+ All Categories
Home > Documents > 11AA.pdf

11AA.pdf

Date post: 12-Dec-2015
Category:
Upload: mahipal
View: 26 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
Popular Tags:
242
Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface Version 2010 (V11) October 2009 DPDS3-PB-200041E
Transcript

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Version 2010 (V11) October 2009 DPDS3-PB-200041E

Copyright Copyright © 1984-2009 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3. Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation P.O. Box 240000 Huntsville, AL 35813 Street address: 170 Graphics Drive, Madison, AL 35758

Terms of Use Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement and Limited Product Warranty ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.

Warranties and Liabilities All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software or applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT. Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Trademarks Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, INtools, ISOGEN, MARIAN, SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems Inc, all rights reserved. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface i

Contents Preface PDS ............................................................................................................................................... vii 

What's New in Equipment Eden Interface .............................................................................................. ix 

The Eden Basics .......................................................................................................................................... 1 

Equipment Symbol Processor ................................................................................................................ 1 Tutorial Definition Table ....................................................................................................................... 5 Forms Interface .................................................................................................................................... 11 

Eden Language Structure ........................................................................................................................ 13 

Beginning Statements........................................................................................................................... 13 Ending Statements ................................................................................................................................ 14 

Begin .............................................................................................................................................. 14 Begin EQP Category ..................................................................................................................... 15 

Variables .............................................................................................................................................. 17 Local Variables .............................................................................................................................. 17 Global Variables Common to Piping, Equipment, and Pipe Support Modeling ........................... 19 Global Variables Common to Equipment and Pipe Support Modeling ......................................... 20 Global Variables (EQP Specific) ................................................................................................... 20 Subscripted Global Variables ........................................................................................................ 21 

Common Keywords ............................................................................................................................. 22 TYPE Statement ............................................................................................................................ 23 DESCRIPTION Statement ............................................................................................................ 23 

Comments ............................................................................................................................................ 24 Operators .............................................................................................................................................. 24 

Arithmetic Operators ..................................................................................................................... 24 Relational Operators ...................................................................................................................... 25 Logical Operators .......................................................................................................................... 25 

Expressions .......................................................................................................................................... 25 Replacement Statements ................................................................................................................ 26 Call Statement................................................................................................................................ 26 Do While Statement ....................................................................................................................... 27 Indexed Do Statement ................................................................................................................... 27 If - then - else Statement ................................................................................................................ 28 

Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 28 Primitives ............................................................................................................................................. 29 

Convert NPD to Subunits .............................................................................................................. 31 Define Active Orientation ............................................................................................................. 31 Draw Cone ..................................................................................................................................... 33 Draw Cylinder ............................................................................................................................... 34 Draw Eccentric Cone ..................................................................................................................... 35 Draw Projected Rectangle ............................................................................................................. 36 Draw Projected Triangle ................................................................................................................ 37 

Contents

ii Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Draw Semi-Ellipsoid ..................................................................................................................... 38 Draw Sphere .................................................................................................................................. 39 Draw Torus .................................................................................................................................... 39 Abort .............................................................................................................................................. 40 Convert Unit .................................................................................................................................. 40 Define Active Point ....................................................................................................................... 41 Define Datum Point ....................................................................................................................... 41 Define Library ............................................................................................................................... 42 Define Nozzle ................................................................................................................................ 43 Define Orientation By Points......................................................................................................... 45 Define Placepoint .......................................................................................................................... 46 Define Point ................................................................................................................................... 46 Display Message ............................................................................................................................ 47 Display Tutorial ............................................................................................................................. 48 Draw Arc ....................................................................................................................................... 49 Draw Complex Surface ................................................................................................................. 50 Draw Con Prism ............................................................................................................................ 52 Draw Curve.................................................................................................................................... 53 Draw Ecc Prism ............................................................................................................................. 54 Draw Ecc Transitional Element ..................................................................................................... 55 Draw Ellipse .................................................................................................................................. 56 Draw Line ...................................................................................................................................... 56 Draw Line String ........................................................................................................................... 57 Draw Proj Hexagon ....................................................................................................................... 57 Draw Proj Octagon ........................................................................................................................ 58 Draw Proj Shape ............................................................................................................................ 60 Draw Rectangular Torus ................................................................................................................ 61 Draw Revolved Shape ................................................................................................................... 62 Draw Shape.................................................................................................................................... 63 Draw Transitional Element ............................................................................................................ 64 Get Arc Points ............................................................................................................................... 64 Get Arc Size................................................................................................................................... 65 Get Date ......................................................................................................................................... 66 Get EQP Category ......................................................................................................................... 66 Get Line Size ................................................................................................................................. 67 Get Point ........................................................................................................................................ 67 Move Along Arc ............................................................................................................................ 69 Move Along Axis .......................................................................................................................... 70 Move Along Line ........................................................................................................................... 72 Move By Distance ......................................................................................................................... 73 Move Data ..................................................................................................................................... 73 Move To Placepoint ....................................................................................................................... 74 Place COG ..................................................................................................................................... 74 Position Cursor .............................................................................................................................. 75 Put Field ......................................................................................................................................... 76 Read Table ..................................................................................................................................... 77 Retrieve Nozzle Parameters ........................................................................................................... 78 Rotate Orientation .......................................................................................................................... 79 

Contents

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface iii

Start Complex Shape ..................................................................................................................... 80 Stop Complex Shape ..................................................................................................................... 80 Store Orientation ............................................................................................................................ 81 Store Nozzle Parameters ................................................................................................................ 82 User Function ................................................................................................................................ 82 

Creating a New Equipment Component ................................................................................................. 93 

Setup for Equipment ............................................................................................................................ 93 Default Project Control Data ................................................................................................................ 94 Extracting Sample Modules ................................................................................................................. 96 Editing Modules ................................................................................................................................... 97 Compiling New Modules ..................................................................................................................... 97 Revising Modules................................................................................................................................. 98 Basic Use of Forms .............................................................................................................................. 98 Input Fields .......................................................................................................................................... 99 System-Defined Field Numbers ........................................................................................................... 99 Application Commands ...................................................................................................................... 100 User-Defined Application Commands ............................................................................................... 100 System-Defined Application Commands ........................................................................................... 101 Additional Features of the Form Interface ......................................................................................... 102 

Defining Symbols .................................................................................................................................... 103 

Eden Debugger ........................................................................................................................................ 107 

Invoking the Debugger ....................................................................................................................... 107 Exiting the Debugger ......................................................................................................................... 107 Concurrent Display ............................................................................................................................ 108 Debugger Commands ......................................................................................................................... 108 

Switch Modes (ON and OF) ........................................................................................................ 108 Set Line Break (B) ....................................................................................................................... 109 Call Tutorial (C) .......................................................................................................................... 109 Deposit Global (DG) ................................................................................................................... 110 Deposit Local (DL) ...................................................................................................................... 110 Examine Local Variables (EL) .................................................................................................... 110 Examine Global Variables (EG) .................................................................................................. 111 Examine Symbol Name (ES) ....................................................................................................... 112 Examine Source File Segments (TYPE) ...................................................................................... 112 Move to Specific Source Line or Continue (Go) ......................................................................... 113 Step through Source Code (S) ..................................................................................................... 113 Step into User Function (SI) ........................................................................................................ 114 Switch the Prompt Terminal (P) .................................................................................................. 114 

Appendix: Codelist (CL330) .................................................................................................................. 115 

Appendix: Equipment Data Definition ................................................................................................. 121 

Equipment Group Database Table ..................................................................................................... 122 Equipment Nozzle Database Table .................................................................................................... 122 

Contents

iv Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples ........................................................................................... 125 

Example 1 (Use of loops) ................................................................................................................... 125 Example 2 (Use of arrays and loops) ................................................................................................. 126 Example 3 (Placing nozzles) .............................................................................................................. 126 Example 4 (Use of character string variables) ................................................................................... 127 Example 5 (Graphic selection commands) ......................................................................................... 127 Example 6 .......................................................................................................................................... 128 Example 7 .......................................................................................................................................... 128 Example 8 .......................................................................................................................................... 129 Example 9 .......................................................................................................................................... 129 Example 10 (Insulation Graphics)...................................................................................................... 133 

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics ......................................................................................................... 143 

Circular Platform (A001) ................................................................................................................... 145 Miscellaneous Platform (A003) ......................................................................................................... 148 Holes for Platforms (A015) ................................................................................................................ 150 Holes for Miscellaneous Platforms (A016) ........................................................................................ 152 Thru Ladder A (A021) ....................................................................................................................... 155 Thru Ladder Details (A029) ............................................................................................................... 156 Side Ladder A (A031) ........................................................................................................................ 158 Side Ladder Details (A039) ............................................................................................................... 159 Stairs A (A041) .................................................................................................................................. 161 Handrail A (A051) ............................................................................................................................. 163 Davit A (A061) .................................................................................................................................. 165 Davit B (A063) ................................................................................................................................... 166 Define (E200) ..................................................................................................................................... 168 Define Weights (E201) ...................................................................................................................... 169 Complex Vertical Cylindrical Equipment, Skirt (E205) .................................................................... 171 Simple Vertical Cylindrical Equipment, Skirt (E210) ....................................................................... 173 Simple Vertical Cylindrical Equipment, Legs (E215) ....................................................................... 175 Spherical Equipment (E230) .............................................................................................................. 177 Complex Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment (E240).......................................................................... 179 Simple Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment (E245) ............................................................................. 181 Horizontal Shell and Tube Exchanger (E305) ................................................................................... 183 Kettle Exchanger (E307) .................................................................................................................... 186 Vertical Shell and Tube Exchanger (E310) ........................................................................................ 188 Exchanger Ends (E319) ...................................................................................................................... 190 Double Pipe Exchanger (E320) .......................................................................................................... 192 Plate Exchanger (E325) ...................................................................................................................... 194 Air Cooler (E330) .............................................................................................................................. 196 Induced Draft Air Cooler Bay (E332) ................................................................................................ 198 Forced Draft Air Cooler Bay (E334).................................................................................................. 199 Horizontal Rotating Equipment and Driver (E405) ........................................................................... 201 Vertical Rotating Equipment and Driver (E410) ............................................................................... 203 E1 Ends (E905) .................................................................................................................................. 205 E2 Ends (E906) .................................................................................................................................. 206 E3 Ends (E907) .................................................................................................................................. 207 

Contents

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface v

Complex Vertical Cylindrical Equipment (N205) ............................................................................. 208 Simple Vertical Cylindrical Equipment (N210) ................................................................................. 209 Simple Vertical Cylindrical Equipment (N215) ................................................................................. 209 Spherical Equipment (N230) .............................................................................................................. 210 Complex Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment (N240) ......................................................................... 210 Simple Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment (N245) ............................................................................ 211 Horizontal Shell and Tube Exchanger (N305) ................................................................................... 211 Kettle Exchanger (N307) ................................................................................................................... 212 Vertical Shell and Tube Exchanger (N310) ....................................................................................... 212 Double Pipe Exchanger (N320) ......................................................................................................... 213 Plate Exchanger (N325) ..................................................................................................................... 213 Air Cooler (N330) .............................................................................................................................. 214 Horizontal Rotating Equipment and Driver (N405) ........................................................................... 214 Vertical Rotating Equipment and Driver (N410) ............................................................................... 215 Gear Cover (U850) ............................................................................................................................. 215 Round Torus Miter (U860) ................................................................................................................ 217 Rectangular Torus Miter (U861) ........................................................................................................ 218 Vertical Oval Torus Miter (U862) ..................................................................................................... 219 Flat Oval Torus Miter (U863) ............................................................................................................ 221 Flat Oval Prism (U870) ...................................................................................................................... 222 Flat Oval Torus (U880) ...................................................................................................................... 223 Rectangular 90 Cone Torus with Offset (U881) ................................................................................ 225 User Projected Shape (USRPRJ) ....................................................................................................... 226 

Index ........................................................................................................................................................ 227 

Contents

vi Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Preface PDS This document provides command reference information and procedural instructions for the Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface task.

List of PDS Documentation DPDS3-PB-200003 - DesignReview Integrator (PD_Review) Reference Guide DPDS3-PB-200004 - Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) User's Guide DPDS3-PB-200005 - EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide DPDS3-PB-200006 - Interference Checker/Manager (PD_Clash) User's Guide DPDS3-PB-200010 - PDS 3D Theory User's Guide DPDS3-PB-200013 - PDS EDEN Interface Reference Guide Volume I : Piping DPDS3-PB-200015 - PDS Equipment Modeling (PD_EQP) User's Guide DPDS3-PB-200017 - PDS ISOGEN Reference Guide, Vol. 1 DPDS3-PB-200022 - PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide DPDS3-PB-200023 - PDS Project Setup Technical Reference DPDS3-PB-200025 - PDS Stress Analysis Interface (PD_Stress) User's Guide DPDS3-PB-200026 - Pipe Supports Modeler Reference Guide DPDS3-PB-200028 - Piping Design Graphics (PD_Design) Reference Guide DPDS3-PB-200030 - Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide DPDS3-PB-200033 - Project Engineer HVAC (PE-HVAC) Reference Guide DPDS3-PB-200034 - Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) Reference Guide DPDS3-PB-200035 - Report Manager (PD_Report) User's Guide DPDS3-PB-200041 - PDS EDEN Interface Reference Guide Volume 2 : Equipment DPDS3-PB-200042 - PDS EDEN Interface Reference Guide Volume 3 : Pipe Supports DPDS3-PE-200016 - PDS Express Project Creation Quick Start Guide DPDS3-PE-200052 - PDS Ortho Draw User's Guide DPDS3-PE-200029 - Piping Model Builder (PD_Model) Reference Guide DPDS3-PE-200031 - Project Engineer HVAC Getting Started Guide DPDS3-PE-200032 - Project Engineer HVAC Overview DPDS3-PE-200045 - PDS Label Library Merger Utility DPDS3-PE-200047 - PDS Reference Data Auditing Tool DPDS3-PE-200048 - Pipe Supports Explorer Utility DPDS3-PE-200050 - Batch Services Quick Start Guide DPDS3-PE-200051 - Batch Services User's Guide

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface vii

Preface PDS

viii Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

What's New in Equipment Eden InterfaceThe following changes have been made to the Equipment Eden Interface: Version 2010 INSULATION_PURPOSE has been added to the equip_group data definition. This attribute

is used to support the display of equipment insulation. New example code for envelope_insulation has been added to the documentation.

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface ix

What's New in Equipment Eden Interface

x Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

S E C T I O N 1

The Eden Basics

Eden is a high-level symbol definition language modeled on the FORTRAN programming language that allows you to design your own symbols for equipment, piping, instrumentation, and specialty items. The Eden language syntax is not case sensitive. You can write code with whatever case conventions make it easiest for you to read. While you do not need a programming background to write Eden programs, any programming experience is highly recommended. Most of the symbol definition functions are built into Eden's command structure. This high-level command structure makes it easier to share code among several different symbol definitions. Eden is flexible enough to allow you to design codes specific to your company's needs, yet offers predefined subroutines, called primitives, which carry out functions often repeated within symbol definitions. For example, the following primitive draws a cone with a length of X units, a diameter at the active point (first end) of Y units and a diameter at the opposite end of Z units: Call Draw_Cone (X, Y, Z) The output produced will look similar to the following graphic:

You can call up to five nested subroutines within a program.

Equipment Symbol Processor The symbol processor is the Eden code that defines an equipment component. It calls all the subroutines or modules that activate forms, check input data, assign placement points, and place graphics. The first line of an Eden module defines the module name. The following statement is used in the Eden modules to indicate a symbol processor module: Symbol_Processor 'MODULE NAME' The module name should be entered using UPPER CASE characters. For example: Symbol_Processor 'APUMP' The following example symbol processor defines a horizontal pump:

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 1

The Eden Basics

2 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

SYMBOL_PROCESSOR 'E405' ! #TYPE =Pumps,All equip #DESC =Hor Rot Equip & Driver ! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! ! E405 : Horizontal Rotating Equipment and Driver ! ! APPLICATION COMMAND ! 4075 - HELP (SPECIFIC) ! 4074 - HELP (GENERAL) ! 4073 - DEFINE ! 4072 - DEFINE CG ! 4051 - RETURN (from help menu) ! 4052 - UPDATE DATE ! ! SYSTEM DEFINED COMMAND USED ! 4001 - EXIT ! 4002 - ACCEPT !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! INT2 accepted LOCATION pointzero [3] ! pointzero = POINT_0 Dimension [100] = 0.0 accepted = 0 tutname = 'E405' Cstring [29] = 'E405' Call Get_Date( Cstring [38] ) ! Do While ( accepted .EQ. 0 ) Call Display_Tutorial ( tutname ) Call Put_Field( Cstring [29], 19 )

The Eden Basics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 3

If( LAST_INP_TYPE .EQ. USER_KEYIN ) then If( LAST_INP_NUM .GE. 2 .AND. LAST_INP_NUM .LE. 18 ) then Call User_Function ( 'E405_CHECK' ) accepted = Dimension [100] Else accepted = 0 Endif Else If( LAST_INP_TYPE .EQ. APPLICATION_CMD ) then if( LAST_INP_NUM .eq. 4075)then Call Display_Tutorial ( 'H405' ) accepted = 0 else if( LAST_INP_NUM .eq. 4074)then Call Display_Tutorial ( 'H200A' ) accepted = 0 else If( LAST_INP_NUM .eq. 4073)then Call User_Function ('E200') accepted = 0 Else If( LAST_INP_NUM .eq. 4072)then Call User_Function ('E201') accepted = 0 Else If( LAST_INP_NUM .eq. 4052 )then Call Get_Date( Cstring [1] ) accepted = 0 Else accepted =1 Endif Endif Endif Endif endif else accepted = 1 Endif Endif Enddo ! ! define PLACE POINTS and DATUM POINTS Call Define_Active_Orientation ( NORTH, UP ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP1, POINT_0 ) Call Define_Datum_Point ( DP [1], POINT_0) offset = Dimension [4] + Dimension [11] Call Move_Along_Axis ( - offset, SECONDARY ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP2, POINT_0 ) Call Define_Datum_Point ( DP [2], POINT_0) ! Draw base plate

The Eden Basics

4 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

base_length = Dimension [1] base_width = Dimension [2] + Dimension [3] base_thickness = Dimension [4] offset_base = 0.5 * Dimension [1] + Dimension [5] offset_norm_base = 0.5 * base_width - Dimension [3] Call Move_To_Placepoint (PP2) Call Move_Along_Axis ( offset_base, PRIMARY ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( offset_norm_base, NORMAL ) Call Rotate_Orientation ( 90.0, NORMAL ) If( base_length .gt. 0.0 .and. base_width .gt. 0.0 .and. base_thickness .gt. 0.0 ) then Call Draw_Proj_Rectangle ( base_length, base_width, base_thickness ) Else Call Abort (0) Endif ! Draw driver driver_length = Dimension [6] + Dimension [7] driver_width = Dimension [8] + Dimension [9] driver_thickness = Dimension [10] + Dimension [11] vert_offset_driver = - Dimension [11] horiz_offset_driver = 0.5 * driver_length - Dimension [6] norm_offset_driver = 0.5 * driver_width - Dimension [9] Call Move_To_Placepoint (PP1) Call Move_Along_Axis ( vert_offset_driver, SECONDARY ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( horiz_offset_driver, PRIMARY ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( norm_offset_driver, NORMAL ) Call Rotate_Orientation ( 90.0, NORMAL ) If( driver_length .gt. 0.0 .and. driver_width .gt. 0.0 .and. driver_thickness .gt. 0.0 ) then Call Draw_Proj_Rectangle ( driver_length, driver_width, driver_thickness ) Endif ! Draw shaft Call Move_To_Placepoint (PP1) Call Move_Along_Axis ( Dimension [7], PRIMARY ) If( Dimension [12] .gt. 0.0 .and. Dimension [13] .gt. 0.0 ) then Call Draw_Cylinder ( Dimension [12], Dimension [13] ) Endif ! Draw housing house_length = Dimension [14] house_width = Dimension [15] + Dimension [16] house_thickness = Dimension [17] vert_offset_house = - Dimension [11] horiz_offset_house = 0.5 * house_length + Dimension [12] + Dimension [7] norm_offset_house = 0.5 * house_width - Dimension [16]

The Eden Basics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 5

Call Move_To_Placepoint (PP1) Call Move_Along_Axis ( vert_offset_house, SECONDARY ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( horiz_offset_house, PRIMARY ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( norm_offset_house, NORMAL ) Call Rotate_Orientation ( 90.0, NORMAL ) If( house_length .gt. 0.0 .and. house_width .gt. 0.0 .and. house_thickness .gt. 0.0 ) then Call Draw_Proj_Rectangle ( house_length, house_width, house_thickness ) Endif ! define CGs Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP1 ) Call Place_Cog (DRY, Dimension [71], Dimension [72], Dimension [73]) Call Place_Cog (OPERATING_1, Dimension [74], Dimension [75], Dimension [76]) Call Place_Cog (OPERATING_2, Dimension [77], Dimension [78], Dimension [79]) Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP2 ) STOP END

Tutorial Definition Table You can create or modify tutorial definition tables using an ASCII editor. The first line in a tutorial definition table defines the tutorial name. This entry must begin in column 1. Each input field in a tutorial must have a corresponding row in a tutorial definition table. Each row includes seven entries: field number, data type, global variable, nozzle number, input attribute, default string, and field name.

1. field number the tutorial field number defining the form (gadget number).

2. datatype the data type of the field. This entry is a number whose values include:

1 =

2 =

3 =

4 =

5 =

6 =

7 =

8 =

9 =

linear dimension

angular dimension

integer (no units)

length for NOZ_LENGTH1

length for NOZ_LENGTH2

length for NOZ_RADIUS

equipment entity database attribute

nozzle entity database attribute

field to receive values for CSTRING_x variables

3. number a table data entry which the system interprets differently for each data type:

For data types 1, 2, and 3, number is a value that can range from 1 to

The Eden Basics

6 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

100 defining the global variable DIMENSION_n, which holds the field’s input. For example, if number is set to 10 in the table, then any input into the field is placed by the software into DIMENSION_10. The symbol can then refer to DIMENSION_10 and use it in any of its calculations. For data types 4, 5, and 6, this field is ignored.

For more information on the Equipment Modeling DDL, refer to Appendix: Equipment Data Definition (on page 121).

For data types 7 and 8, number defines the attribute number in the appropriate database entity to which the field inserts input. These numbers provide the link to the database.

Use the following numbers for the respective attribute:

equip_group ( datatype = 7 ) 1 , equip_indx_no , integer 2 , equip_no , character(30) 3 , equip_descr_1 , character(40) 4 , equip_descr_2 , character(40) 5 , tutorial_no , character(6) 6 , equip_class , character(2) 7 , dry_weight , double 8 , oper_weight_1 , double 9 , oper_weight_2 , double 10 , insulation_thk , double 11 , construction_stat , short , standard note 130 12 , equipment_division , short , standard note 69 13 , approval_status , short , standard note 35 14 , insulation_purpose , short , standard note 220

The Eden Basics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 7

equip_nozzle ( datatype = 8 ) 1 , nozzle_indx_no , integer 2 , nozzle_no , character(10) 3 , equip_indx_no , integer 4 , nominal_piping_dia , short 5 , rating , character(8) 6 , preparation , short , standard note 330 7 , piping_mater_class , character(16) 8 , unit_no , character(12) 9 , fluid_code , short , standard note 125 10 , unit_code , character(3) 11 , line_sequence_no , character(16) 12 , heat_tracing_reqmt , short , standard note 200 13 , heat_tracing_media , short , standard note 210 14 , insulation_purpose , short , standard note 220 15 , insulation_thk , double 16 , table_suffix , short , standard note 576 17 , service , character(20) 18 , schedule_thickness , character(8) 19 , nor_therm_growth_X , double 20 , nor_therm_growth_Y , double 21 , nor_therm_growth_Z , double 22 , alt_therm_growth_X , double 23 , alt_therm_growth_Y , double 24 , alt_therm_growth_Z , double 25 , construction_stat , short , standard note 130

For example, if the data type is 7 and number is 1, then any input to this field is put in the equipment entity, attribute number 1 (or equipment name) field of the record that is written to the database when the component is placed. Refer to the model database DDL for a complete description of each attribute in both the equipment and nozzle entities.

For data type 9, number specifies the CSTRING variable to receive the value.

4. nozzle a number that identifies the nozzle with which a field will be associated. This field is only needed for data types 4, 5, 6, and 8. Each nozzle in a parametric symbol must be assigned a unique umber. (Refer to the DEFINE_NOZZLE and the RETRIEVE_NOZZLE_PARAMETERS primitives.) This number is the same as the RETRIEVE_NOZZLE_PARAMETERS primitive. Each nozzle in a parametric requires a set of fields for defining the nozzle size, rating, facing, tag, possibly length, and possibly other database attributes. The nozzle number allows the software to distinguish one nozzle tag input field or one nozzle size input field from another.

5. attributes an entry that describes the input field itself. The available values for this item include:

1 - user input is optional. 2 - user input is required.

The Eden Basics

8 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

3 - user input is optional but causes return to the symbol. This type of field has also been called a terminated key-in field. Refer to the DISPLAY_TUTORIAL primitive for more information on how to handle these fields from the symbol.

4 - user input is required but causes return to the symbol. This is also a terminated key-in field.

Example:

A tutorial has a field for which the attribute entry in the tutorial definition table contains the number two. You are not allowed to select the ACCEPT field to exit from the tutorial until you have provided a valid input for the field.

6. default an entry allowing you to define a default for a particular tutorial input field. The entry can take on several forms. All of the expressions outlined below must be surrounded by single quotes in the tutorial definition table.

The default types include: ’"XXX-"’ A literal string used for defaulting character string

input fields.

The double quote must be included as a delimiter. Example:

"101-C" ’Fxxx-’ Use the current value of tutorial field number xxx as

the default for this field. Note that user-defined field numbers can range from 1 to 200. (System-defined fields range from 201 to 256 and may not appear in default expressions.) Example: F23

’Dxxx-’ Use the contents of DIMENSION_xxx as the default for this field. There is no practical limit on the number of tutorials that a symbol can activate. Therefore, any calculations that were made before the symbol definition activated the current tutorial can provide defaults for that tutorial. Example: D23

’Cxx-’ Use the contents of CSTRING_xx as the default for this field.

’xx.x-’ Decimal constant with or without a decimal point. All distances are assumed to be in English subunits (inches). If the default is a metric constant, then the constant should be given a suffix of M. Example: 125M

The Eden Basics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 9

’expr-’ Combine any of the above three default types to form a valid arithmetic expression. Valid operators are +, -, *, /, and ˆ. Use parentheses to alter order of evaluation. An expression is not evaluated until all fields are defined. Example: (F1+F2)/2+30. This expression is not computed until both fields 1 and 2 are defined.

Default expressions are currently limited to 20 characters in length.

Example:

’’’101-C’’’ - default for an equipment item name field

Example:

’F1/2+10’ - use the first input to field 1 divided by 2 plus 10 inches as the default.

7. name defines an alphanumeric name for the field which will be used in future software releases for reporting and alphanumeric placement of parametrics. The field name can be a maximum of 10 characters in length.

The gadget numbers 1-10 (Column 1 - Field) in the tutorial definition table correspond to gadget numbers 951-960 on the form.

1 = 951 2 = 952 3 = 953 4 = 954 5 = 955 6 = 956 7 = 957 8 = 958 9 = 959 10 = 960

Gadget numbers 11, 12, 13 ... remain 11, 12, 13 ....

Example The following example tutorial definition table displays a piece of equipment with 7 dimensional inputs (rows 1-7), 4 nozzles (rows 11-26), and 3 fields for equipment entity database attributes (rows 8-10). EXCHNG

The Eden Basics

10 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

1, 1, 1, , 1, ’30’, ’DIA’ 2, 1, 2, , 1, ’’, ’NOZ1’ 3, 1, 3, , 1, ’F2’, ’NOZ2’ 4, 1, 4, , 1, ’’, ’NOZ3’ 5, 1, 5, , 1, ’’, ’SUPP1’ 6, 1, 6, , 1, ’’, ’SUPP2’ 7, 1, 7, , 1, ’’, ’PROJ’ 8, 7, 1, , 1, ’’, ’EQPNAM’ 9, 7, 2, , 1, ’’, ’DESCR’ 10, 7, 5, , 1, ’"C"’, ’CLASS’ 11, 8, 1, 20, 1, ’’, ’TAG1’ 12, 8, 3, 20, 1, ’’, ’SIZE1’ 13, 8, 4, 20, 1, ’’, ’RATING1’ 14, 8, 5, 20, 1, ’21’, ’FACING1’ 15, 8, 1, 19, 1, ’’, ’TAG2’ 16, 8, 3, 19, 1, ’F12’, ’SIZE2’ 17, 8, 4, 19, 1, ’F13’, ’RATING2’ 18, 8, 5, 19, 1, ’21’, ’FACING2’ 19, 8, 1, 18, 1, ’’, ’TAG3’ 20, 8, 3, 18, 1, ’’, ’SIZE3’ 21, 8, 4, 18, 1, ’’, ’RATING3’ 22, 8, 5, 18, 1, ’21’, ’FACING3’ 23, 8, 1, 17, 1, ’’, ’TAG4’ 24, 8, 3, 17, 1, ’F20’, ’SIZE4’ 25, 8, 4, 17, 1, ’F21’, ’RATING4’ 26, 8, 5, 17, 1, ’21’, ’FACING4’

In the tutorial above, the default value for field 1 on the tutorial is 30 inches. Since the default value for field 3 is F2, your first input to field 2 is displayed in field 3 by

the system. Since the second column is equal to 1 for fields 1 through 7, they are all linear dimension

inputs. Your input into these fields is placed in variables DIMENSION_1 through DIMENSION_7.

Field 8 collects your equipment ID (equipment entity, attribute number 1). In general, it is easier to place the symbol if the equipment ID field is put directly on each tutorial.

There is a set of four fields on the tutorial for each nozzle defined in the parametric (tag, size, rating, end prep). This is the minimum number of fields that can be present to allow complete definition of a nozzle.If you do not define the nozzle tag for a particular nozzle, then that nozzle will not be placed.

Nozzle tag numbers cannot be defaulted. Since there is no field on the tutorial that explicitly collects individual nozzle lengths, the

symbol logic must calculate them. Each nozzle has a default end prep of 21 (nozzle entity, attribute number 5). This is a code-

listed attribute in the database. The value 21 is the codelist value for a raised face. The default expression can also be entered as ’"RFFE"’, which is the codelist text for raised face end prep.

The Eden Basics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 11

Forms Interface Forms in equipment modeling serve to collect input via key-in fields or command buttons. They also provide feedback information to the user through message fields. Input fields and application commands have unique identification numbers. These numbers are used with the tutorial definition table (TDF) to communicate to the software the use for each field or command. The data entered through the forms serves as the input that defines the values of the global variables used by the symbol processor. When a new equipment item is defined through Eden, a form has to be created to define the component's parameters. DBAccess is used to build forms.

The Eden Basics

12 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

S E C T I O N 2

Eden Language Structure

Eden is similar to the FORTRAN programming language. Therefore, the general rules for evaluating expressions in Eden are identical to those in FORTRAN.

You do not need to know FORTRAN to use the Eden language. Eden definitions are usually simpler than FORTRAN programs. To use Eden, you must be able to visualize the symbol (in 3D) that you want to develop. The Eden language structure incorporates: Statements

Beginning Ending

Variables Local Global

Keywords Operators

Arithmetic Relational Logical

Expressions Functions Primitives (or Subroutines)

Beginning Statements Beginning statements define the types of modules being entered. Names within the single quotes must be all upper case. SP - Symbol_Processor '6CHAR' UF - User_Function_Definition '28CHAR'

Examples Symbol_Processor 'A001' User_Function_Definition 'A001_CHECK'

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 13

Eden Language Structure

14 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Ending Statements Ending statements mark the end of the module in which the system has been processing. Ending statements in the symbol and subsymbol processor include:

Stop End

Ending statements in the user functions include: Return End

Begin The Begin primitive allows you to generate graphics for 2D shadow, envelopes, various light steel categories, and holes.

Syntax Call Begin <category>

Options

category keyword specifying the graphics category you want to place. Allowable category keywords for each class of graphics include:

Regular equipment graphics EQUIPMENT This is executed at the beginning of symbol

execution. It is needed if you have placed some other category and want to resume equipment graphics.

Interference envelope graphics

ENVELOPE_MAINTENANCE_HARD ENVELOPE_MAINTENANCE_SOFT

ENVELOPE_ACCESS_HARD ENVELOPE_ACCESS_SOFT

ENVELOPE_SAFETY_HARD ENVELOPE_SAFETY_SOFT

ENVELOPE_CONSTRUCTION_HARD ENVELOPE_CONSTRUCTION_SOFT

2D footprint graphics

SHADOW

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 15

Light steel graphics

LADDER PLATFORM HANDRAIL MISCELLANEOUS

Holes HOLE

NOHOLE The keywords HOLE and NOHOLE are different from other keywords in that they do not represent a separate category of graphics. You can include Begin(HOLE) within another Begin category. A Begin(HOLE) remains in effect across other Begin calls until a Begin(NOHOLE) is reached. Hole graphics are given the level and symbology of holes.

Surface Type SOLID

SURFACE The keywords SOLID and SURFACE set the active surface type of subsequent graphics. The default is SOLID. This results in capped surfaces. With the SURFACE keyword, you can place uncapped shapes such as open-ended cylinders.

Except for nozzles and placepoints, all graphics assume the level and symbology of the last executed Begin statement. Placepoints always belong to the equipment/parametric cell. If your symbol executes no EQUIPMENT category graphics, an otherwise empty parametric equipment cell is created for housing the placepoints. A Begin statement can repeat itself any number of times. After execution, it becomes the active category for subsequent element placement calls. A (non-EQUIPMENT) Begin statement must be followed by at least one call to generate graphic elements; otherwise, that Begin statement will have no effect on symbol graphics.

Begin EQP Category The Begin EQP Category primitive allows you to create graphics for various EQUIPMENT subcategories each having its own level and symbol.

Syntax Begin_EQP_Category (subcategory)

Eden Language Structure

16 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Options

subcategory is a character string indicating the subcategory. There are presently 20 subcategories available. A valid subcategory must be one that has been defined via the Project Administrator Module. Alternatively, you can use one of the following:

’EQP_CATEGORY_1’, ’EQP_CATEGORY_2’, .. .. .. ’EQP_CATEGORY_20’

The argument is checked only when you place the symbol and not during compilation.

Restrictions You can use this call only within the Begin (EQUIPMENT) call. Also, you cannot make this call when Draw Complex Surface or Start Complex Shape is in progress. By default, the Begin (EQUIPMENT) and Begin EQP Category ('EQP_CATEGORY_1') calls are active when a symbol executes.

Example The following example is a valid code fragment:

Call Begin (ENVELOPE_MAINTENANCE_HARD) .. ! place envelope graphics .. Call Begin (EQUIPMENT) ! to set category next Call Begin_EQP_Category ('PUMPS') ! 'PUMPS' must be a valid ! category for project Call Draw_Complex_Surface (4, 0) .. ! pump graphics .. Call Begin (HOLE) ! HOLE is allowed anywhere .. .. Call Draw_Complex_Surface (-99, 0) ! end pump

The following example is not a valid code fragment: Call Begin (LADDER) Call Begin_EQP_Category ('PUMPS') ! Begin (EQUIPMENT) not active .. ..

This example is not a valid code fragment: Call Draw_Complex_Surface (4, 0) Call Begin_EQP_Category ('PUMPS') ! cannot change within surface

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 17

Variables Variables in Eden can be either local or global. They can contain either numeric or alphanumeric data. Internally, numeric data is stored as REAL*8 (double precision). If a different data type is required in the context of an expression, then the conversion is performed at the time the expression is evaluated.

Variable names can be either upper or lower case. Symbols tend to be easier to read when you use all lower case for local symbols and all upper case for global symbols or vice versa.

Examples When converting a floating point number to an integer, the fractional part of the floating

point number is truncated. A variable used in a logical expression evaluates to TRUE when the value of the variable is

1 and 0 when the logical value is FALSE. Variables that hold values representing distances are assumed to be in subunits. A variable

containing the value 25 represents 25 inches in an English unit design file and 25 millimeters in a metric unit design file.

Be careful when using hard coded numbers or when using the system_of_units variable.

Local Variables Local variables are user defined and declared in the symbol definition. You can refer to a local variable only when you are in the same module as the local variable. Local variable names are formed using alphanumeric (a-z), numeric (1-9), and special (_ and $) characters. They must begin with an alphanumeric character and must be less than or equal to 31 characters in length.

The Eden compiler does not verify the spelling of local variables within call statements. It assumes a null value for the misspelled variable at component placement time. The Eden language refers to constants as local variables. Both character strings and numeric constants are valid; however, character string constants must be surrounded by single quotes. In most cases, character strings and constants are case sensitive. Thus, a and A are interpreted differently.

Examples

diameter 13.25

shell_thickness 'A TEXT STRING'

projection_1 radius [2]

25 Only in Pipe Support and Equipment Modeling can you declare local variable types. The variable types default to either CHARACTER or REAL depending on the context. To override this default, you can use a local variable type declaration statement anywhere before the variable(s) is (are) actually referenced. Variable types INT2, R8, and LOCATION are recognized by the compiler.

Eden Language Structure

18 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Example In the following example, variables a, B, and C are declared as type short integers. They hold values ranging from -32767 to 32767.

Int2 a Int2 B, C

Example In the example below, variable d is declared as a type REAL, capable of holding decimal fractional values. This is the usual default type for numeric variables. However, explicit typing to this category may be necessary to declare local arrays.

R8 d As a recommendation, all declaration statements should be placed at the very beginning of the symbol code and not interspersed among statements to be executed during symbol placement. This improves program readability. Also in Pipe Support and Equipment Modeling, referencing a variable using subscripts is extremely useful when coding repetitive statements such as the body of a loop. Prior to use, variables must appear in a type declaration in which its subscript or index range is also specified.

Example In the example below, D is an array of 5 short integer variables stored contiguously. The individual elements are referenced as D[1], D[2], D[3], D[4], and D[5]. You can also use a variable or an arithmetic expression for indexing, such as D[i] where i is a value between 1 and 5, or D [i+1] where i is a value between 0 and 4. INT2-typed variables are particularly useful in DO loops and array indexing where integral numbers are necessary and roundoffs must be avoided. They are also stored much more efficiently than REAL variables.

Int2 D[5], EF[6]

Example Below, LENGTHS is an array of 10 REAL variables. They are referenced as LENGTHS [1] ... LENGTHS [10].

R8 LENGTHS [10]

Example In the following example, PT is declared as a buffer with four locations.

Location PT [12] where

PT [1], PT [4], PT [7] PT [10] are x-coordinates

PT [2], PT [5], PT [8] PT [11] are y-coordinates

PT [3], PT [6], PT [9] PT [12] are z-coordinates These variables provide alternate locations for the point values that you do not want to store in POINT_1 ... POINT_24... POINT [125]. You will also find them useful in accessing individual components of a location. (Refer to the REPLACEMENT STATEMENT section.)

Location PT [12]

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 19

An array-formatted variable may also be referenced without the index. In this case, the first element of the array is accessed. For example, PT and PT [1] are functionally the same in the above example. Currently, only single expression subscripts (that is, single dimensioned arrays) are possible.

Global Variables Common to Piping, Equipment, and Pipe Support Modeling

Global variables are system-defined names allowing you to refer to them at any subroutine level. More specifically, you can use them for passing values between subroutine levels or for communicating input values to the symbol. The following list shows the global variables common to all Eden applications. Refer to the application-specific section for detailed information concerning specific global variables.

Global variables are system-defined. You cannot declare global or subscripted global variables.

Input_n (Input_1 through Input_20) An array with up to 20 variables used to define the input parameters for table lookups. (Input_11 through Input_20 are specifically designed for user function arguments in equipment and pipe support modeling.)

Output_n (Output_1 through Output_20) An array with up to 20 variables where the results of the table lookup are stored. (Output_11 through Output_20 are specifically designed for user function return arguments in equipment and pipe support modeling.)

Dimension_n (Dimension_1 through Dimension_100 for equipment and pipe supports, Dimension_1 through Dimension_20 for piping) General purpose variables used for communicating input to the symbol logic. You can also use these variables for passing values between subroutines or simply for local storage. (Dimension_20 is for angle; Dimension_1 through Dimension_19 is for linear piping.)

Pr_Rating_n Variable containing the current item pressure rating value.

Nom_Pipe_D_n Variable containing the current item nominal pipe diameter. This variable contains the nominal diameter in coded units. A special primitive is provided to help you convert from coded units to subunits.

Gen_Type_n Variable containing the current item end preparation generic type (BLT, MAL, FEM). This is a read-only variable.

Term_Type_n Variable containing the current item end preparation termination type (21, 22, and 23 will fall into Term_Type_1=20). This is a read-only variable.

Standard_Type Variable containing the current item standard type value. This is a read-only variable and is a function of TABLE_SUFFIX.

Eden Language Structure

20 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Global Variables Common to Equipment and Pipe Support Modeling

The following list contains global variables common to Equipment and Pipe Support Modeling. For more information on global variables, refer to the System-defined Subroutines section and the Eden User Interface section.

Point_n Point [n]

(Point_1 - Point_24) Names representing points that have been defined or saved for later use in a symbol definition. The n in [n] can be between 0 and 125.

Act_Lib Variable that contains an identifier for the active library of dimension tables. This is a read-only variable.

Cstring_n (Cstring_1 through Cstring_40) Names representing global character variables. Each name can contain a maximum of 50 characters.

Last_Inp_Type Last_Inp_Num

Refer to the Display_Tutorial primitive in the Eden Primitives section.

NPD_Unit_Type Contains the nominal piping diameter system of units defined for the model file. You can test this variable against the keywords ENGLISH and METRIC. This is a read-only variable.

Global Variables (EQP Specific) The following list contains global variables specific to Equipment Modeling. For more information on global variables, refer to the System-defined Subroutines section and the Eden User Interface section.

PP_Location_n (PP_Location_1 - PP_Location_10) Names representing the point locations that have been defined as place points in the course of a symbol definition.

End_Prep Variable containing the current nozzle end preparation value.

Noz_Length1 Variable containing the current nozzle length value. This variable applies to type 2 and 3 nozzles only. For type 3, the length is from the end of the nozzle connected to the vessel to the centerline of the bend.

Noz_Length2 Variable containing the current second nozzle length value. This variable applies to type 3 nozzles only and measures the length from the face of the nozzle to the centerline of the bend.

Noz_Radius Variable containing the current nozzle bend radius. Applies to type 3 nozzles only.

Table_Suffix Variable containing the current nozzle table suffix value.

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 21

PP_Primary_n (PP_Primary_1 through PP_Primary_10) Names representing orientation of primary axes for place points defined during symbol placement.

PP_Secondary_n (PP_Secondary_1 through PP_Secondary_10) Names representing orientation of secondary axes for place points defined during symbol placement.

PP_Normal_n (PP_Normal_1 through PP_Normal_10) Names representing orientation of normal axes for place points defined during symbol placement.

Subscripted Global Variables In Equipment and Pipe Support Modeling, a global variable can contain an index value as part of the variable name even though the index value is not a variable. This is known as subscripted global variables. For example, Dimension_10 and Point_3 are global variables whose index values are 10 and 3, respectively. You can reference the same location using subscripted global variables, which contain an index either as a variable or as an expression. For example, Dimension [10] and Point [3] are subscripted global variables whose index values are 10 and 3, respectively. They are equivalent to Dimension_10 and Point_3. Subscripted global variables are useful when using loops. Below is a list comparing the two methods of accessing global variables with indexes:

Subscripted Global Variable (variable index)

Global Variable with non-variable index

cstring [1] ... cstring [40] cstring_1 ... cstring_40

dimension [1] ... dimension [100] dimension_1 ...dimension_100

dp [1] ... dp [30] dp1 ... dp30

inputs [1] ... inputs [20] input_1 ... input_20

outputs [1] ... outputs [20] output_1 ... output_20

pp [1] ... pp [10] pp1 ... pp10

point [0] ... point [125]

(point [0] ... point [24] point_0 ... point_24)

pp_primary [1] ... pp_primary [10] pp_primary_1 ...pp_primary_10

pp_secondary [1] ... pp_secondary [10] pp_secondary_1 ...pp_secondary_10

pp_normal [1] ... pp_normal [10] pp_normal_1 ... pp_normal_10

pp_location [1] ... pp_location [10] pp_location_1 ...pp_location_10 A global variable referenced without a subscript causes the first element to be accessed. Thus, Point and Point [0], Dimension and Dimension_1 are functionally equivalent.

Eden Language Structure

22 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Common Keywords Eden uses keywords for labeling specific values or groups of values. All keywords except TRUE and FALSE can appear as arguments in system-defined primitives (or subroutines). Keywords can be upper or lower case. For consistency, this reference guide displays keywords in upper case.

TRUE Logical true. Used in logical expressions.

FALSE Logical false. Used in logical expressions.

MALE FEMALE BOLTED

Keywords for generic end preparation.

PRIMARY SECONDARY NORMAL

Keywords used to identify or refer to individual refresh tee axes.

ENGLISH METRIC

Names used to define the units of a constant used in the symbol definition.

ACTIVE_POINT POINT_0

Name representing the location of the active point in the local coordinate system defined by the symbol. These names can be used interchangeably.

EAST WEST NORTH SOUTH UP DOWN

Keywords used to define directions in the local coordinate system defined by the symbol definition.

PP1 - PP10 Names representing symbol place point locations and orientations. A maximum of 10 place points can be defined for 1 symbol.

DP1 - DP30 Names representing equipment datum point locations and orientations.

SYMBOL_PROCESSOR

Module type of all equipment modeling Eden definitions. It is used in the first statement of a symbol definition.

ENG_COMM_LIB EQP_TABLES

Names representing the different libraries that can be made active in a symbol definition.

RETURN STOP

Terminates module execution normally. If it encounters either a RETURN or STOP in a user function, the system returns control to the calling module.

END Must be the last line in the symbol source code. If execution reaches the END statement, an implicit STOP is executed.

There are other keywords primarily used in specific subroutine calls. These keywords can be found in the subsections that describe their associated primitives. Keywords

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 23

APPLICATION_CMD and USER_KEYIN are described under the DISPLAY_TUTORIAL primitive. Keywords such as PT_BORE and COG_TYPE are explained under the GET_POINT and PLACE_COG primitives, respectively.

TYPE Statement TYPE statements allow you to assign up to 150 labels or types to a symbol. The syntax for the TYPE statement is:

#TYPE = Type 1, Type 2, Type 3, ... , Type n where

Type 1 ... Type n Labels representing types under which the symbol will be classified.

Using each type, you can later inquire on the symbol. (Refer to the PDS Equipment Modeling (PD_EQP) Reference Guide for information on Parametric Help.) A type label can be up to 28 characters long. The compiler automatically left justifies each type and converts it to upper case. You can enter any number of complete type labels that fit in a line. Multiple TYPE statements are allowed. A TYPE statement can appear anywhere in the source code; however, the # character must appear in column 1.

Example The following TYPE statement appears in the code for a multi-diameter vertical vessel supported on skirt.

#TYPE = tower, vertical vessel, drum, reactor

DESCRIPTION Statement The DESCRIPTION statement assigns a descriptive phrase of up to 40 characters to the symbol. This description appears next to the symbol name when you inquire on the symbol library from the PDS Equipment Task. (See the PDS Equipment Modeling (PD_EQP) Reference Guide for information on Parametric Help.) The syntax for the DESCRIPTION statement is:

#DESC = This is a description A DESCRIPTION statement can appear anywhere in the symbol code. The description string is placed left justified by the compiler. When more than one DESCRIPTION statement appears, only the last statement is used. The # character must appear in column one.

Eden Language Structure

24 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Comments When you place an exclamation point (!) anywhere in an Equipment Modeling source line, the remainder of that line is treated as a comment.

Example Call define_placepoint (PP1, POINT_1) ! POINT_1 is used to ! define place point 1

Operators Operators are used in conjunction with variables to form expressions. As in FORTRAN, operators can be any one of three types: 1. Arithmetic 2. Relational 3. Logical

Arithmetic Operators Arithmetic operators are used to form arithmetic expressions. These operators follow the mathematical conventions. Valid arithmetic operators include:

+ addition

- subtraction

* multiplication

/ division

** exponentiation

// concatenation using '_'

|| concatenation without using '_' The first five operators (+, -, *, /, **) can only be used with numeric local and global variables. The concatenation operators (// , || ) can be used with both numeric and string variables. The concatenation operator // is used primarily to form table names. It joins two variables together with an underbar (_) character. The result is a text string.

Example 'ABC' // 'DEF' produces 'ABC_DEF'

When using the concatenation operation, real numbers are converted to integers (that is, truncated), then converted to character strings and finally joined together with the underbar character. The concatenation operation is generally used to form messages and character field outputs.

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 25

Relational Operators Relational operators are used to form relational expressions that test the value of an Eden expression or establish conditions under which a group of Eden statements can be executed. Valid relational operators include:

.EQ. equal to

.NE. not equal to

.GE. greater than or equal to

.GT. greater than

.LE. less than or equal to

.LT. less than Periods must appear before and after the expression.

Relational operators can be used on both numeric and character string variables. However, mixing the two types of operands for a given operation produces computing errors. In character relational expressions, less than means precedes in the ASCII collating sequence, and greater than means follows in the ASCII collating sequence. 'ABCD' .LT. 'ACCD' If two strings in a relational expression are not the same length, the shorter one is padded on the right with spaces until the lengths are equal. 'PQRSTU' .EQ. 'PQR ' 'PQRSTU' .EQ. 'PQR '

Logical Operators Logical operators are used to combine relational expressions into more complex logical expressions. Valid logical operators include:

.OR. logical or

.AND. logical and Periods must appear before and after the expression.

Expressions Expressions are variables, constants, and operators combined to make statements. The format of most Eden expressions is the same as in FORTRAN. Valid expressions include:

Replacement simple arithmetic replacement

Call executes primitives or subroutines

Do while execute loop

Indexed Do execute loop

If - then - else conditional execution

Eden Language Structure

26 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

For every IF statement, there must be an ENDIF statement to end the expression. You c

nest up to five If-then-else expressions within an Eden module. an

For the Replacement, Do while, and If-then-else expressions, you can use parentheses to alter the precedence of calculation.

Replacement Statements Replacement statements are used to set variables or perform calculations. The following list illustrates the various Replacement statements:

thickness = 25. vessel_od = DIMENSION_1 test = test + 1 tutor_name = 'EXCH1' table_name = 'BLT' // GEN_TYPE // PR_RATING // '5' dim_a = (dim_b + dim_c) * 2. + dim_d

In Equipment and Pipe Support Modeling, all three components of a point (or location variable) can be replaced by another point value with one assignment statement.

Example In the following example, PT is declared as a buffer of three points. The second statement saves pt [4], pt [5], pt [6] into global location Point_5. In the third statement, the location value stored in point [2] is saved in a PT buffer, the x-coordinate being assigned to pt [7], y to pt [8], and so forth. Likewise, in the last statement, the POINT_3 components are replaced by those of Point_4 in one aggregate operation.

Location pt [9] . . point [5] = pt [4] . . pt [7] = point_2 . . point_3 = point [4]

Call Statement Call statements are used to execute system primitives. The syntax for the Call statement is: call "primitive" or "subroutine" (argument 1, argument 2, ...)

Example Call Place_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends (diameter, length) Call Define_Placepoint (PP1)

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 27

Do While Statement The Do While statement is used to form indefinite loops. The condition of a Do While statement must equal a logical value (either true or false). The body of the Do While statement will be repeatedly executed as long as the logical expression remains true.

Example The following Do While loop places four cylinders end to end. The pretested loop condition fails on the fifth try (if i equals 4), and control transfers to the message display routine. i = 0 do while (i .LT. 4) i = i + 1 Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends (diam, leng) enddo Call Display_Message ('Out of loop now')

Indexed Do Statement The Indexed Do statement allows you to form loops that execute a specified number of times. This number is determined by an initial, a terminal, and an incremental parameter of a control variable. The syntax for the Indexed Do statement is: do V = v1, v2, v3 . . . enddo where

V is a control variable (non-string type)

v1 v2 v3

are constants or variables that evaluate to the initial, terminal, and incremental parameters respectively. v3 is optional. If v3 is omitted, the system assumes that the incremental parameter is one.

V3 cannot be negative.

Example In this example, I is set to 1. The body of the loop is then executed. I increments by 2 each time the cycle is complete, and the value 3 is checked against the terminator 20. The iteration continues as long as I is less than or equal to 20. When the iteration is greater than 20, the loop ends. do I = 1, 20, 2 . . . enddo

Eden Language Structure

28 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

If - then - else Statement If - then - else statements are used when a group of statements is to be conditionally executed. The Eden syntax is the same as FORTRAN syntax. if (condition) then . . . else . . . endif

Example if (DIMENSION_1 .gt. 24.) then thk = thk + .125 else thk = thk + .250 endif

An If statement of the form if (condition) is not valid. In Eden, all If statements must be of the form If (condition) then. The else statement is optional.

Functions Eden provides several functions for performing common mathematical operations. These functions can be used within replacement statements.

The following functions must contain the parentheses. DSQRT () square root DABS () absolute value DSINR () sine of an angle in radians DCOSR () cosine of an angle in radians DTANR () tangent of angle in radians DSIND () sine of an angle in degrees DCOSD () cosine of an angle in degrees DTAND () tangent of an angle in degrees DASINR () arcsine returned in radians DACOSR () arccosine returned in radians DATANR () arctangent returned in radians DASIND () arcsine returned in degrees DACOSD () arccosine returned in degrees DATAND () arctangent returned in degrees

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 29

Example The following list illustrates a few possible Eden functions: length = hypot * DSIND (30.) side = DTANR (pi/2) + 32. hypot = DSQRT (a**2 + b**2) angle = DATAND (side1/side2)

Primitives Primitives are system-defined routines that perform specific functions for symbol definition. Convert NPD to Subunits (on page 31) Define Active Orientation (on page 31) Draw Cone (on page 33) Draw Cylinder (on page 34) Draw Eccentric Cone (on page 35) Draw Projected Rectangle (on page 36) Draw Projected Triangle (on page 37) Draw Semi-Ellipsoid (on page 38) Draw Sphere (on page 39) Draw Torus (on page 39) Abort (on page 40) Convert Unit (on page 40) Define Active Point (on page 41) Define Datum Point (on page 41) Define Library (on page 42) Define Nozzle (on page 43) Define Orientation By Points (on page 45) Define Placepoint (on page 45) Define Point (on page 46) Display Message (on page 47) Display Tutorial (on page 48) Draw Arc (on page 49) Draw Complex Surface (on page 50) Draw Con Prism (on page 52) Draw Curve (on page 53) Draw Ecc Prism (on page 54) Draw Ecc Transitional Element (on page 55) Draw Ellipse (on page 56) Draw Line (on page 56) Draw Line String (on page 57)

Eden Language Structure

30 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Draw Projected Hexagon (see "Draw Proj Hexagon" on page 57) Draw Projected Octagon (see "Draw Proj Octagon" on page 58) Draw Projected Shape (see "Draw Proj Shape" on page 60) Draw Rectangular Torus (on page 61) Draw Revolved Shape (on page 61) Draw Shape (on page 63) Draw Transitional Element (on page 64) Get Arc Points (on page 64) Get Arc Size (on page 65) Get Date (on page 65) Get Equipment Category (see "Get EQP Category" on page 66) Get Line Size (on page 66) Get Point (on page 67) Move Along Arc (on page 69) Move Along Axis (on page 70) Move Along Line (on page 71) Move By Distance (on page 72) Move Data (on page 73) Move To Placepoint (on page 74) Place COG (on page 74) Position Cursor (on page 75) Put Field (on page 76) Read Table (on page 76) Retrieve Nozzle Parameters (on page 78) Rotate Orientation (on page 79) Start Complex Shape (on page 79) Stop Complex Shape (on page 80) Store Orientation (on page 81) Store Nozzle Parameters (on page 81) User Function (on page 82) User Function FLAT_OVAL_PRISM (on page 83) User Function FLAT_OVAL_TOR (on page 84) User Function FLAT_OVAL_SEG_TOR1 (on page 85) User Function FLAT_OVAL_SEG_TOR2 (on page 86) User Function ROUND_SEG_TOR1 (on page 87) User Function ROUND_SEG_TOR2 (on page 88) User Function RECT_SEG_TOR (on page 89) User Function RECT_FLAT_OVAL (on page 89) User Function ROUND_RECT (on page 91)

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 31

Convert NPD to Subunits The Convert NPD to Subunits primitive converts the coded input value and returns its Real*8 equivalent. This primitive is often used for converting the nominal piping diameter that is stored in the database.

Metric files base the diameter in millimeters. Imperial files store the nominal piping diameter as NPD 1/32 + 5000. Thus, 1 inch NPD is 5000 + 32 * 1 = 5032 20 inch NPD is 5000 + 32 * 20 = 5640 For Eden symbols in Piping that use imperial and metric files, hard-coding the dimensions is not recommended. A dimension entered as 5 inches and placed in an Imperial file is interpreted as 5 inches. However, the same value placed in a Metric file is interpreted as 5 millimeters. Instead of hard coding, load the dimensions in a table to allow the piping software to convert the dimensions to the correct values. This primitive does not perform unit conversions. If American standard pipe sizes are being used in a Metric file, this primitive will return the NPD in inches.

Syntax Call Convert_NPD_To_Subunits (coded_input, npd)

Options

coded_input The nominal pipe diameter in internal or coded units. This variable must be the keyword Nom_Pipe_D_n.

npd The nominal piping diameter in subunits.

Examples In this example, the Real*8 equivalence of the coded NPD in Nom_Pipe_D_1 is returned in Pipe_Dia_1. Call Convert_NPD_To_Subunits (Nom_Pipe_D_1, pipe_dia_1)

All NPDs used internally in the software are in encoded form. Most table lookups based on NPDs require the input to be in encoded form. However, if a nozzle size is needed in a calculation, it must be converted from internal units to subunits.

Define Active Orientation The Define Active Orientation primitive allows you to define the active orientation by specifying the directions of the primary and secondary axes. The orientation is defined in the local coordinate system by the symbol. This definition has no bearing on the design file coordinate system.

Eden Language Structure

32 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

In Piping, this primitive defines the current flow centerline and a direction that is normal to the flow centerline in terms of the connect point orientation (defined by the symbol's connect point geometry) in order to place graphic shapes.

Specific keywords are available for specifying either the primary axis or the secondary axis of the connect point's orientation.

Syntax Call Define_Active_Orientation (primary, secondary)

Options

primary Variable that defines the flow centerline or primary direction.

secondary Variable that defines the line perpendicular to the flow centerline or secondary direction.

Valid keywords for the primary and secondary variables include:

EAST PP_PRIMARY_n

WEST PP_SECONDARY_n

NORTH PP_NORMAL_n

SOUTH PRIMARY

UP SECONDARY

DOWN NORMAL For the Equipment Modeling keywords, you must define n using the Define Placepoint primitive before using any of the PP keywords.

If the initial active orientation for a symbol definition has the primary pointing east and the secondary pointing north, the normal axis of the active orientation would be up. (Normal axis can be found using the right-hand rule.)

Example In the following example, the primary orientation is set to point west, and the secondary orientation is set to point down:

Call Define_Active_Orientation (WEST,DOWN)

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 33

Draw Cone The Draw Cone primitive places a cone where the first end is at the current active point and the second end is at a location computed by the system given the input length along the primary axis. You must define the diameters of each end of the cone with separate variables.

Syntax Call Draw_Cone (length, diameter_1, diameter_2)

Options

length The length of the cone (A), which can be positive or negative.

diameter_1 The diameter of the cone (B) at the active point.

diameter_2 The diameter of the cone (C) at the end opposite the active point.

Examples SYMBOL_PROCESSOR 'CCONE' tutnam = 'CCONE' Call Display_Tutorial (tutnam) A = DIMENSION_1 ! length of cone B = DIMENSION_2 ! diameter at active pt C = DIMENSION_3 ! diameter at opposite end Call Define_Placepoint (PP1, Point_0) Call Draw_Cone (A, B, C) Call Define_Active_Orientation (WEST, NORTH) Call Define_Placepoint (PP2, POINT_0) stop end

Eden Language Structure

34 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Draw Cylinder The Draw Cylinder primitive places a cylinder where the first end is at the current active point and the second end is at a location computed by the system along the primary axis. You must specify the diameter and the length of the cylinder. The active point will be moved to the opposite end.

Syntax Call Draw_Cylinder (length, diameter)

Options

length The length (A) of the cylinder.

diameter The diameter (B) of the cylinder.

Examples SYMBOL_PROCESSOR 'CYLIND' tutnam = 'CYLIND' Call Display_Tutorial (tutnam) A = DIMENSION_1 ! length B = DIMENSION_2 ! diameter Call Define_Placepoint (PP1, Point_0) Call Draw_Cylinder (A, B) Call Define_Active_Orientation (WEST, NORTH) Call Define_Placepoint (PP2, POINT_0) stop end

If cyl_len is positive, a cylinder of the specified length is drawn. If cyl_len is zero, nothing happens. If cyl_len is negative, the active point is moved the specified negative distance, but the cylinder is not drawn.

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 35

Draw Eccentric Cone The Draw Eccentric Cone primitive allows you to place an eccentric truncated cone. The first end is at the current active point. The second end is at a location the system computes by moving from the current active point along the current flow centerline by the length of the cone and along the secondary axis by the negative of the eccentric offset. You must specify the eccentric offset and the diameters of both ends of the eccentric cone.

Syntax Call Draw_Eccentric_Cone (length, eccentric_offset, diameter_1, diameter_2)

Options

length Cone length (A).

eccentric_offset Eccentric cone offset. This is the center-to-center distance between cone endpoints as measured positive going against the secondary.

diameter_1 Diameter (B) at active point.

diameter_2 Diameter (C) at the opposite end.

Examples SYMBOL_PROCESSOR 'ECONE' tutnam = 'ECONE' Call Display_Tutorial (tutnam) A = DIMENSION_1 ! length B = DIMENSION_2 ! diameter at active pt C = DIMENSION_3 ! diameter at opposite end offset = (C - B) * 0.5 ! offset Call Define_Placepoint (PP1, Point_0) Call Draw_Eccentric_Cone (A, offset, B, C) Call Define_Active_Orientation (WEST, NORTH) Call Define_Placepoint (PP2, POINT_0) stop end

Eden Language Structure

36 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Draw Projected Rectangle The Draw Projected Rectangle primitive allows you to place a component with a rectangular cross section. The current active point must be moved to the center of the rectangle, and the primary axis must point in the direction of the projection. The secondary axis orients the side of length1.

You must specify the projected height, projected width, and projected length dimensions.

Syntax Call Draw_Proj_Rectangle (length1, length2, projection)

Options

length1 Length of the rectangle side (C) parallel to the secondary axis of the active orientation.

length2 Length of the rectangle side (B) parallel to the normal axis of the active orientation.

projection Length of the projection (A).

Restrictions The active point must be located at the center of geometric shape of the rectangle. The refresh tee must point inward (the direction of projection).

Examples SYMBOL_PROCESSOR 'RECTNG' tutnam = 'RECTNG' Call Display_Tutorial (tutnam) A = DIMENSION_1 ! length of projection B = DIMENSION_2 ! length of side parallel to normal C = DIMENSION_3 ! length of side parallel to secondary Call Define_Placepoint (PP1, POINT_0) Call Draw_Proj_Rectangle (C, B, A) Call Define_Active_Orientation (WEST, NORTH) Call Define_Placepoint (PP2, POINT_0) stop end

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 37

Draw Projected Triangle The Draw Projected Triangle primitive allows you to place a component that has an isosceles triangular cross-section. The current active point must be moved to the center of the cross-section. The primary axis points in the direction of the projection, and the secondary axis points to the base of the triangle. You must specify the side length, base length, and projected length dimensions.

Syntax Call Draw_Proj_Triangle (project_side_length, project_base_length, project_length)

Options

project_side_length Length of the side (A) of the triangle.

project_base_length Length of the base (B) of the triangle.

project_length Length of the projection (C).

Restrictions The active point must be located at the center of geometric shape of the triangle. The refresh tee must point inward.

Make sure that dimension A is greater than 1/2 of dimension B, otherwise, errors will result.

Examples SYMBOL_PROCESSOR 'TRIANG' tutnam = 'TRIANG' Call Display_Tutorial (tutnam) A = DIMENSION_1 ! length a side B = DIMENSION_2 ! length of base C = DIMENSION_3 ! length of projection angle = DIMENSION_4 if (B .GT. 0) then DIMENSION_4 = 0 endif if (angle .GT. 0 .AND. B .EQ. 0) then angle = angle * 0.5 B = 2.0 * (A * DSIND(angle))

Eden Language Structure

38 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

endif Call Define_Placepoint (PP1, Point_0) Call Draw_Proj_Triangle (A, B, C) Call Define_Active_Orientation (WEST, NORTH) Call Define_Placepoint (PP2, POINT_0) stop end

Draw Semi-Ellipsoid The Draw Semi-Ellipsoid primitive allows you to place a semi-ellipsoid, where the center is at the current active point. You must specify the diameter of the major axis and the radius of the minor axis.

The system does not update to a new active orientation after placement of the semi-ellipsoid.

Syntax Call Draw_Semi_Ellipsoid (major_axis_diameter, minor_axis_radius)

Options

major_axis_diameter Variable defining the major axis diameter (A).

minor_axis_radius Variable defining the minor axis radius (B).

Examples SYMBOL_PROCESSOR 'SELLIP' tutnam = 'SELLIP' Call Display_Tutorial (tutnam) A = DIMENSION_1 ! major axis diameter B = DIMENSION_2 ! minor axis radius Call Define_Placepoint (PP1, Point_0) Call Draw_Semi_Ellipsoid (A, B) stop end

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 39

Draw Sphere The Draw Sphere primitive allows you to place a sphere where the center of the sphere is at the current active point. You must specify the radius, and the radius must be greater than or equal to (≥) 1/64 inches.

The refresh tee and orientation will not change after placement.

Syntax Call Draw_Sphere (radius)

Options

radius Variable (A) defining the sphere radius.

Examples A = F_to_C_Dim_1*0.5 ! defining sphere radius Call Draw_Sphere (A)

Draw Torus The Draw Torus primitive allows you to place a torus from the current flow centerline to the current direction of the secondary axis using the bend radius, bend angle, and diameter you specify. This call changes the active orientation.

The torus diameter must be greater than or equal to (≥) 1/32 inches, and the bend radius diameter must be greater than or equal to (≥) 1/32 inches and greater than (>) 1/2 the torus diameter.

Eden Language Structure

40 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Syntax Call Draw_Torus (radius, angle, diameter)

Options

radius The bend radius of the torus (B) as measured from the origin of the torus to its centerline.

angle The bend angle of the torus (C).

diameter The diameter of the torus (A).

Examples SYMBOL_PROCESSOR 'CTORUS' tutnam = 'CTORUS' Call Display_Tutorial (tutnam) A = DIMENSION_1 ! torus diameter B = DIMENSION_2 ! torus bend radius if (DIMENSION_3 .eq. 0) then DIMENSION_3 = 90 endif C = DIMENSION_3 ! bend angle Call Define_Placepoint (PP1, Point_0) Call Draw_Torus (B, C, A) Call Rotate_Orientation (-180., SECONDARY) Call Define_Placepoint (PP2, POINT_0) stop end

Abort The Abort primitive allows you to terminate symbol execution without having to place graphics. It is similar to the QUIT option available on symbol tutorials. When the system encounters an Abort call, it displays a message indicating that the symbol execution has aborted.

Syntax Call Abort (0)

Convert Unit The Convert Unit primitive is used to convert distance in a given system of units to the design file system of units. Both lengths are expressed in subunits.

Syntax Call Convert_Unit (length1, unit type, outlength)

Options

length1 Is the input length in subunits.

unit type Is the input as ENGLISH (for inches) or METRIC (for mm) to indicate the units in which length1 is expressed.

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 41

outlength Is the output after converting length1 to design file system of units.

Example In the following example, a length of 10 inches is input. length2 receives the value 10 if the unit type is set to English or 254 if the unit type is set to Metric. Call Convert_Unit (10, ENGLISH, length2)

Define Active Point The Define Active Point primitive functions similarly to the Define Active Orientation primitive, but also defines the active point in the symbol's local coordinate system.

Syntax Call Define_Active_Point (point)

Options

point Is a keyword specifying a previously defined point. Valid values for point include:

local point variables global point variables PP_LOCATION_q (q = 1 - 10)

Restrictions The initial position of the active point must be located at the symbol's local coordinate

system origin. Before using POINT_n, you must define it by calling Define Point. Before using PP_LOCATION_q, you must define it by calling Define Placepoint.

Example Call Define_Active_Point (POINT_3) Call Define_Active_Point (PP_LOCATION_1)

Define Datum Point The Define Datum Point primitive allows you to define and place up to 30 datum points per symbol. The orientation of the datum point is controlled by the active orientation at the time of the call.

Syntax Call Define_Datum_Point (dp, point)

Eden Language Structure

42 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Options

dp Is a keyword specifying the datum point number. Valid values include:

1...30

point Is a keyword specifying the datum point location. Valid values include:

ACTIVE_POINT local point variable global point variable PP_LOCATION [1] ... PP_LOCATION [10]

Example In the following example, the call defines dp [1]. Its location is given by point_2.

Call Define_Datum_Point (dp [1], point_2 ) In the Add and Modify & Copy commands, this call will not replace or add to existing

datum points for the equipment. In the Modify mode, it will replace existing datum points only if they are still associated with the symbol being modified. (Refer to the PDS Equipment Modeling (PD_EQP) Reference Guide for more information.) In either case, if nonparametric datum points already exist for the piece of equipment, Define Datum Point calls will have no effect.

Define Library The Define Library primitive allows you to activate an alternate physical data library.

Syntax Call Define_Library (library_no)

Options

library_no Is a keyword, variable, or expression whose numeric value specifies which library is to be opened next. Valid values and their symbolic keywords include:

1 - ENG_COMM_LIB The piping physical data library. 3 - EQP_TABLES The equipment physical data library.

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 43

ACT_LIB Keyword that allows you to see which commodity library is currently open. ACT_LIB is a read-only variable and can only be set by the system following a successful Define_Library call. When a symbol is first called up, the system automatically opens the correct commodity library depending on the nozzle diameter system of units for the file and then sets ACT_LIB to 1 (ENG_COMM_LIB). Therefore, at the beginning of symbol execution, you can always expect the default piping physical data library to be open. Subsequently, with the Define_Library primitive, you can change the active library.

Example In the following example, the active library number (1 or 3) is saved, and the English commodity library is temporarily opened. When the library is no longer needed, the previously active library is restored.

save_library = ACT_LIB Call Define_Library (ENG_COMM_LIB) . . . Call Define_Library (save_library) -OR- save_library = ACT_LIB Call Define_Library (1) . . . Call Define_Library (save_library)

Define Nozzle The Define Nozzle primitive places a nozzle at the current active point using the current active orientation. Before calling this primitive, you must call Retrieve Nozzle Parameters and set the necessary global variable assignments, such as Noz_Length1, Noz_Length2, or Noz_Radius.

Syntax Call Define_Nozzle (noz_type, noz_num, noz_end)

Options

Noz_type A character variable or constant defining the nozzle type. Valid values include:

1 ’NOZ1’ for type 1 nozzles. Consists of a basic flange.

Eden Language Structure

44 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

No user input is required. The nozzle length is set by the flange thickness table.

2 ’NOZ2’ for type 2 nozzles. Consists of a flange as well as a

neck. The length is user-defined. A = Noz_Length1

3 ’NOZ3’ for type 3 nozzles. Commonly referred to as a goose neck nozzle.

Two lengths and the bend radius are user-defined. A = Noz_Length1 B = Noz_Length2 C = Noz_Radius

Noz_num A nozzle number that uniquely identifies the nozzle within the parametric symbol. The nozzle number must NOT be used for more than one nozzle within a parametric symbol definition. Currently, this number can take on a value of 1 to 20, inclusively. Therefore, a single parametric can not have more than 20 nozzles.

Noz_end A variable or constant with a value of 1 or 2 that defines the end of the nozzle placed at the active point. A value of 1 specifies the end connected to the equipment item. A value of 2 specifies the end connected to piping.The primary axis of the active orientation is used to orient both type 1 and type 2 nozzles. The primary and secondary axes are used to orient type 3 nozzles.

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 45

Example SYMBOL_PROCESSOR 'NOZ1' tutnam = 'NOZ1' Call Display_Tutorial (tutnam) nozend = DIMENSION_100 nozsum = 20 Call Retreive_Nozzle_Parameters (nozsum) Call Define_Nozzle ('NOZ1', noznum, nozend) stop end

You must call Retrieve Nozzle Parameters before Define Nozzle.

Define Orientation By Points The Define Orientation By Points primitive allows you to redefine the active orientation using three known points.

Syntax Call Define_Orientation_By_Points (PT1, PT2, PT3)

Options

pt1 The active primary direction is computed using pt1 as the start point. Global or local point.

pt2 The active primary direction is computed using pt2 as the end point. Global or local point.

pt3 The active secondary direction is computed using pt3 as the end point. The start point is the intersection between the primary vector from pt1 and its perpendicular from pt3. Global or local point.

In case one or more of these points are coincident, the active orientation is unchanged.

Example In the following example, the call orients the active primary along the line from POINT_1 to POINT_2, and the active secondary towards POINT_3 along a perpendicular of the primary: Call Define_Orientation_By_Points (point [1], point [2], point [3])

Eden Language Structure

46 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Define Placepoint The Define Placepoint primitive allows you to define the symbol placepoint. Every symbol must have at least one place point.

Syntax Call Define_Placepoint (pp, point)

Options

pp A keyword defining the placepoint number. Valid values for pp include:

PP1 - PP10

Up to 10 placepoints can be defined for a symbol.

point Keyword defining the place point location. Valid values for point include:

ACTIVE_POINT local point variables global point variables pp_location_1 - pp_location_10

Example In this example, place point number 1 is defined.

Call Define_Placepoint (PP1, POINT_0) At symbol placement time, the symbol place point is aligned with the current design file active point. The place point's primary axis is aligned with the design file active orientation primary axis. Therefore, the symbol's local coordinate system is transformed to that defined by the refresh tee.

Define Point The Define Point primitive allows you to save a point or to calculate a new point based on a reference point and a delta x, y, and z.

Syntax Call Define_Point (point, ref_point, delta_x, delta_y, delta_z, flag)

Options

point A keyword specifying the saved or calculated point storage location. Local or global point variables are valid values.

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 47

ref_point A keyword specifying the point to be saved or the point from which the new point is to be calculated. Valid values for ref_point include: local point variable global point variable pp_location_1 - pp_location_10

delta_x The delta in the x or east direction of the symbol coordinate system from the reference point.

delta_y The delta in the y or north direction of the symbol coordinate system from the reference point.

delta_z The delta in the z or up direction of the symbol coordinate system from the reference point.

flag [optional] If supplied, the deltas are interpreted as offsets along the active primary, secondary, and normal respectively.

Examples In this example, the current active point is saved in POINT_1. You can make POINT_1 the

active point again simply by calling Define Active Point. Call Define_Point (POINT_1, ACTIVE_POINT, 0, 0, 0)

In this example, a new point is calculated from POINT_1. The result is saved in POINT_2. delx = 24. dely = 24. delz = 24. Call define_point (POINT_2, POINT_1, delx, dely, delz)

Display Message The Display Message primitive allows you to display a message in a tutorial field or MicroStation 'ER' field.

Syntax Call Display_Message (message, fldno)

Options

message A variable or expression. If necessary, the message can be converted to displayable characters for output. You can specify a message up to 50 characters in length; however, only the first 40 characters will be displayed.

fldno A field number on the active tutorial. Possible values are 0 - 255. If 0, the message is displayed in the MicroStation ’ER’ field.

[optional] This argument defaults to 0 if omitted. Tutorial fields defined (via TDF) to contain data for symbol generation should not receive

input through this call.

Eden Language Structure

48 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Example dia = -10.0 . . . Call Display_Message ('Cone dia is negative: ' || dia, 0 ) The actual message displayed in the 'ER' field will read: Cone dia is negative: -10.0

Display Tutorial The Display Tutorial primitive allows you to activate a tutorial and specify an optional tutorial definition file name.

Syntax Call Display_Tutorial (tutnam, tdfnam)

Options

tutnam Name of the form (1 - 6 characters) to be activated.

tdfnam [optional] The tutorial file name (1 - 6 characters). If omitted, the TDF name defaults to the tutorial name itself. This argument allows you to activate the same tutorial with different TDF names and hence different global variables for each activation. The same TDF name can be used with different tutorials.

Example This call activates a tutorial named TEST. Call Display_Tutorial ('TEST')

There is a limit of 10 forms that can be activated. It is also possible to activate the same form several times per symbol execution. However, if a TDF name is used with several forms in the modify mode, only the first such form will display existing data.

Interacting with Tutorials Terminated fields allow the symbol code some control over operator interaction when a tutorial is active. Refer to the Creating the Tutorial Definition Table section for creating these fields. When you select a terminated application command or key-in field, the control returns to the symbol code, which can test specific global variables identifying the field number and its type. The global variable LAST_INP_TYPE has the type of the most recent terminated field selected. It can be tested against the following keywords for field types:

APPLICATION_CMD application command field USER_KEYIN user key-in field

The global variable LAST_INP_NUM contains the number of the last terminated field selected.

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 49

Example Three possible operator actions can result in control returning to the symbol code for the example below. The first test is against a terminated application field selection. If positive, the data in DIMENSION [LAST_INP_NUM] is accessed and output to field 90. The second test is for the selection of a terminated key-in field. The contents of CSTRING [LAST_INP_NUM] is output to field 100. The receiving variable for the keyed-in text is stored as per TDF. The symbol waits for further operator input by calling Display Tutorial. The tutorial does not redisplay since it is already active. If both tests fail, you must select ACCEPT (the control variable will be set to TRUE), forcing exit from the loop. ACCEPTED = FALSE do while (.not. ACCEPTED) Call Display_Tutorial ('TEST') if (LAST_INP_TYPE .eq. APPLICATION_CMD) then ! application cmd ! ... field Call Put_Field (dimension [LAST_INP_NUM], 90) else if (LAST_INP_TYPE .eq. USER_KEYIN) then Call Put_Field (cstring [LAST_INP_NUM],100) else ACCEPTED = TRUE ! get out of loop endif endif enddo

Draw Arc The Draw Arc primitive allows you to place an arc. An arc may be considered a continuous segment of an ellipse whose axes are known.

Syntax Call Draw_Arc (semimajor, semiminor, start_angle, sweep_angle)

Options

semimajor Supplies the length of the semimajor axis and is oriented by the local primary.

semiminor Supplies the length of the semiminor axis and is oriented by the local secondary.

start_angle Specifies the start point of the arc segment. The value range is -360.0 to 360.0. Larger or smaller values are reduced to this range, remaindering by 360.0. Positive angles are measured by rotating the primary into the secondary counterclockwise in a right-handed system.

Eden Language Structure

50 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

sweep_angle Specifies the span of the arc segment. The value range is -360.0 to 360.0. Larger or smaller values are reduced to this range, remaindering by 360.0. Rotational sense is counterclockwise, right-handed, from start_angle.

The parent ellipse is completely known given the active primary, secondary and the axis lengths. The two angles merely fix the arc’s angular position and not the distance of any of its points from the foci.

Example This call places an elliptical arc with major and minor axes of 40 and 20 units respectively. The primary axis is rotated from a 90 degree position through a right angle to produce the arc. Call Draw_Arc (20, 10, 90, 90)

If you are placing a non-circular arc with start or sweep angles that are NOT a multiple of 90 degrees, MicroStation computes these angles differently. To convert your angle to the input argument, use the following formula:

tan(microstation_angle) = (semimajor/semiminor) tan(your_angle)

Draw Complex Surface The Draw Complex Surface primitive allows you to build projected and revolved shapes one element at a time. Familiarity with the structure of 3D MicroStation shapes is required to use this primitive effectively.

There is a limitation on using multiple Draw Line commands for getting a complex shape inside Draw Complex Surface to create new support symbols. You must use the line strings or projected shape to create complex shapes.

Syntax Call Draw_Complex_Surface (argument_1, argument_2) The call can be made in three modes: 1. Start surface 2. Change class or symbology of elements being placed 3. End surface Each argument has a different interpretation for each mode.

Start Surface Used to start the surface.

Syntax Call Draw_Complex_Surface (no_of_ele, surface_type)

Options

no_of_ele The number of elements per face.

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 51

surface_type The MicroStation surface type to build. Typical surface types include:

0 - surface of projection 8 - surface of revolution

Change Class/Symbology Used to change the class/symbology of elements being placed within the surface. A negative symbol must be placed in front of the first argument.

Syntax Call Draw_Complex_Surface (_element_class, symbology)

Options

element_class The class of elements to be placed. Typical classes include: primary elements (class = 0, the default) rule elements (class = 4)

symbology The symbology of elements to be placed.

This is an INTEGER (I*4 or 4 bytes) word. The upper word (2 bytes) is set to:

0 - allows defaults to apply 1 - apply line code only 2 - apply line weight only 4 - apply color only

Sum the above values to send in combinations. For example, (3) code and weight to apply is the result of adding (1) apply line code only and (2) apply line weight only. Using this process, you can enter numbers 0-7 (default to all of the above).

The lower word supplies the symbology (line code, line weight, color) as per MicroStation format.

Complete Surface Used to complete the surface.

Syntax Call Draw_Complex_Surface (-99, 0)

Example This example shows the creation of a flat-oval projected shape. The opening Draw Complex Surface specifies that each face is composed of 4 elements and that this is a surface of projection.

Eden Language Structure

52 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

The code for placing a flat-oval face is shown (2 arcs and 2 lines). The second call to Draw Complex Surface specifies that rule lines (class=4) will be placed. The minus sign before the class argument is needed by the system to identify ongoing calls. The final call terminates surface construction. Call Draw_Complex_Surface (4, 0) ! start projected; Call Draw_Arc (radius, radius, -90, 180) Call Draw_Line (point_1, point_2) Call Draw_Arc (radius, radius, 90, 180) Call Draw_Line (point_3, point_4) Call Draw_Complex_Surface (4, 0) ! surface 2 Call Draw_Arc (radius, radius, -90, 180) Call Draw_Line (point_5, point_6) Call Draw_Arc (radius, radius, 90, 180) Call Draw_Line (point_7, point_8) Call Draw_Complex_Surface (-4, 0) ! start rule lines Call Draw_Line (point_1, point_5) ! place a rule line Call Draw_Line (point_2, point_6) ! place a rule line Call Draw_Line (point_3, point_7) ! place a rule line Call Draw_Line (point_4, point_8) ! place a rule line Call Draw_Complex_Surface (-99, 0) ! wrap it up

Draw Con Prism The Draw Con Prism primitive places a concentric prism by a point in the center of either rectangular end. The active orientation primary axis is used to orient the direction of projection. The secondary axis orients a side of each end.

Syntax Call Draw_Con_Prism (length_sec, length_norm, length_proj, length2_sec, length2_norm)

Options

length_sec The length of rectangular base along secondary.

length_norm The length of rectangular base along normal.

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 53

length_proj The length of projection.

length2_sec The length of rectangular top along secondary.

length2_nor The length of rectangular top along normal.

Example SYMBOL_PROCESSOR 'RPRISM' tutnam = 'RPRISM' Call Display_Tutorial (tutnam) A = DIMENSION_1 ! length of A B = DIMENSION_2 ! length of B C = DIMENSION_3 ! length of C D = DIMENSION_4 ! length of D proj = DIMENSION_5 ! length of E Call Define_Placepoint (PP1,POINT_0) Call Draw_Con_Prism (A, B, proj, C, D) Call Define_Active_Orientation (WEST, NORTH) Call Define_Placepoint (PP2, POINT_0) stop end

Draw Curve The Draw Curve primitive allows you to place a curve string.

Syntax Call Draw_Curve (no_vertex, point_buffer)

Options

no_vertex The number of vertices from 1 - 90.

point_buffer The location of the 1st vertex. The other vertices are sequentially stored in the buffer. Use global or local point buffers.

Example In this example, the call places a stream curve of 20 points in POINT [24] .. POINT [43]. Call Draw_Curve (20, point_24)

This primitive is not supported by the equipment task but is available in the HVAC task.

Eden Language Structure

54 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Draw Ecc Prism The Draw Ecc Prism primitive places an eccentric prism by a point in the center of either rectangular end. The active orientation primary axis orients the direction of projection. The secondary axis orients a side of each end as well as the offset direction.

Syntax Call Draw_Ecc_Prism (length_sec, length_norm, length_proj, length2_sec, length2_norm, offset)

Options

length_sec The length of rectangular base along secondary.

length_norm The length of rectangular base along normal.

length_proj The length of projection.

length2_sec The length of rectangular top along secondary.

length2_norm The length of rectangular top along normal.

offset The center-to-center distance between base end and top end measured (positive) against the secondary.

Example SYMBOL_PROCESSOR 'EPRISM' tutnam = 'EPRISM' Call Display_tutorial (tutnam) A = DIMENSION_1 ! length of A B = DIMENSION_2 ! length of B C = DIMENSION_4 ! length of C D = DIMENSION_5 ! length of D E = DIMENSION_3 ! length of E offset = (A - C) / 2.0 ! offset Call Define_Placepoint (PP1, POINT_0) Call Draw_Ecc_Prism (A, B, E, C, D, offset) Call Define_Active_Orientation (WEST, NORTH) Call Define_Placepoint (PP2, POINT_0)

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 55

stop end

Draw Ecc Transitional Element The Draw Ecc Transitional Element primitive allows you to place an eccentric transitional element by a point in the center of either the rectangular or circular face. The active orientation primary axis orients the direction of projection. The secondary axis orients a side of the rectangular base and the direction of offset.

Syntax Call Draw_Ecc_Transitional_Element (length_sec, length_norm, length_proj, length_radius, offset)

Options

length_sec The length of rectangular base along secondary.

length_norm The length of rectangular base along normal.

length_proj The length of projection.

length_radius The radius of circular face.

offset The center-to-center distance between the rectangular end and the circular end as measured positive going against the active secondary.

Example SYMBOL_PROCESSOR 'ETRANS' tutnam = 'ETRANS' Call Display_tutorial (tutnam) A = DIMENSION_1 ! length of A B = DIMENSION_2 ! length of B C = DIMENSION_3 ! length of C D = DIMENSION_4 / 2.0 ! length of D offset = (A - D) / 2.0 ! offset Call Define_Placepoint (PP1, POINT_0) Call Draw_Ecc_Transitional_Element (A, B, C, D, offset) Call Define_Active_Orientation (WEST, NORTH) Call Define_Placepoint (PP2, POINT_0) stop end

Eden Language Structure

56 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Draw Ellipse The Draw Ellipse primitive allows you to place an ellipse. The major and minor axes are oriented by the local primary and secondary axes respectively.

Syntax Call Draw_Ellipse (semimajor_len, semiminor_len)

Options

semimajor_len Half the length of the major axis.

semiminor_len Half the length of the minor axis.

Example This call places an ellipse whose major and minor axes are 40 and 20 units long. The major axis points DOWN.

Call Define_Active_Orientation ( DOWN, WEST ) Call Draw_Ellipse (20.0, 10.0)

Draw Line The Draw Line primitive allows you to place a line.

Syntax Call Draw_Line (start_pt, end_pt)

Options

start_pt The location of first vertex. Use global or local point.

end_pt The location of second vertex. Use global or local point.

Example In this example, the call places a line from POINT_10 to POINT_20. Call Draw_Line (point_10, point 20)

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 57

Draw Line String The Draw Line String primitive allows you to place a line string.

Syntax Call Draw_Line_String (no_vertex, point_buffer)

Options

no_vertex Supplies the number of vertices from 1 - 90.

point_buffer The location of the first vertex. The other vertices are sequentially stored in the buffer. Use global or local point buffers.

Example In this example, the call places a line string of 20 vertices, which are found in POINT[24] ... POINT [43]. Call Draw_Line_String (20, point [24] )

Draw Proj Hexagon The Draw Proj Hexagon primitive allows you to place a projected hexagon by a point in the center of a face. The active orientation primary axis orients the direction of projection. The secondary axis orients a flat of the hexagonal solid.

Syntax Call Draw_Proj_Hexagon (side_length, proj)

Options

side_length Side B is the side length.

Eden Language Structure

58 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

proj Side A is the length of the projection.

Example SYMBOL_PROCESSOR 'HEXAGON' tutnam = 'HEXAGON' Call Display_Tutorial (tutnam) A = DIMENSION_1 ! length of A D_in = DIMENSION_2 ! D_out = DIMENSION_3 ! D_side = DIMENSION_4 ! if (D_side .GT. 0) then DIMENSION_2 = 0 DIMENSION_3 = 0 endif if (D_side .LE. 0) then if (D_in .GT. 0) then DIMENSION_3 = 0 D_side = D_in * DTAND(30.0) endif endif if (D_side .LE. 0) then if (D_out .GT. 0) then D_side = D_out / 2 DIMENSION_2 = 0 endif endif Call Define_Placepoint (PP1, POINT_0) Call Draw_Proj_Hexagon (D_side, A) Call Define_Active_Orientation (WEST, NORTH) Call Define_Placepoint (PP2, POINT_0) stop end

Draw Proj Octagon The Draw Proj Octagon primitive places a projected octagon by a point in the center of a face. The active orientation primary axis orients the direction of the projection. The secondary axis orients a flat side of the octagonal solid.

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 59

Syntax Call Draw_Proj_Octagon (side_length, proj)

Options

side_length Side B is the side length.

proj Side A is the length of the projection.

Example SYMBOL_PROCESSOR 'OCTGON' tutnam = 'OCTGON' Call Display_Tutorial (tutnam) A = DIMENSION_1 ! length of A D_in = DIMENSION_2 ! D_out = DIMENSION_3 ! D_side = DIMENSION_4 ! if (D_side .GT. 0) then DIMENSION_2 = 0 DIMENSION_3 = 0 endif if (D_side .LE. 0) then if (D_in .GT. 0) then DIMENSION_3 = 0 D_side = D_in * DTAND(22.5) endif endif if (D_side .LE. 0) then if (D_out .GT. 0) then D_side = D_out * DSIND (22.5) DIMENSION_2 = 0 endif endif Call Define_Placepoint (PP1, POINT_0) Call Draw_Proj_Octagon (D_side, A) Call Define_Active_Orientation (WEST, NORTH) Call Define_Placepoint (PP2, POINT_0) stop end Call Draw_Proj_Octagon (12, 12)

Eden Language Structure

60 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Draw Proj Shape The Draw Proj Shape primitive allows you to place an arbitrary (planar) shape and project it by a given distance. The active primary orients the direction of projection.

Syntax Call Draw_Proj_Shape (no_pnt, proj_len, pnt_buffer)

Options

no_pnt The number of vertices from 1 - 24.

proj_len The length (A) of the projection.

pnt_buffer [optional] If supplied, points to the location of the first vertex. If omitted, the vertices are assumed to be in the global POINT array with vertex 1 in point_1, vertex 2 in point_2, and so forth. Local or global point arrays.

Examples The length of the shape to be placed is 10.0 units. The 5 vertices are in POINT [101] ...

POINT [105]. Call Draw_Proj_Shape ( 5, 10.0, point [101])

The projected shape's vertices are found in POINT_1 ... POINT_5. After placement, the active point is updated from the face by which it was placed to the opposite face. Call Draw_Proj_Shape ( 5, 10.0 )

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 61

Draw Rectangular Torus The Draw Rectangular Torus primitive places a rectangular torus by a point in the center of either rectangular end. The active orientation primary axis orients the direction of projection. The secondary axis points toward the origin of the torus.

Syntax Call Draw_Rectangular_Torus (bend_radius, sweep_angle, length_sec, length_norm)

Options

bend_radius The length from torus origin to center of either end.

sweep_angle The angle formed between two radii joining the center of each end to the origin.

length_sec The length of rectangular end along secondary.

length_norm The length of rectangular end along normal.

Example SYMBOL_PROCESSOR 'RTORUS' tutnam = 'RTORUS' Call Display_Tutorial (tutnam) A = DIMENSION_1 ! length of A B = DIMENSION_2 ! length of B C = DIMENSION_3 ! length of C D = DIMENSION_4 ! Sweep angle of D Call Define_Placepoint (PP1, POINT_0) Call Draw_Rectangular_Torus (C, D, A, B) Call Rotate_Orientation (-180.,SECONDARY) Call Define_Placepoint (PP2, POINT_0) stop end

Eden Language Structure

62 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Draw Revolved Shape The Draw Revolved Shape primitive allows you to create a MicroStation surface of revolution by rotating an arc, line string, or shape. The axis of rotation is the primary axis passing through the symbol active point. Rotation is counter-clockwise.

Syntax Call Draw_Revolved_Shape (generator_type, total_stroke_angle, no_of_steps point_buffer, argument_5, argument_6)

Options

generator_type A keyword specifying the element type being revolved. Keywords include:

EL_LINESTR for line string EL_SHAPE for planar shape EL_ARC for arc

total_stroke_angle Specifies the overall angle of revolution in degrees from -360 to +360.

no_of_steps Specifies the number of sections to create for the revolved shape. For example, if you specify a value of 2, there will be one intermediate instance of the generator element which will split the revolved shape into two sections. Must be at least 1.

point_buffer An array of points used to define the rotating element.

If you are rotating a shape or line string, this array supplies the vertices of the element. If you are rotating an arc, this array must contain three points to define the arc. The first point is the arc origin. The second point defines the length and direction of the primary axis as measured from the arc origin. The third point defines the arc secondary, also relative to the arc origin.

argument_5 For line string or shape: the number of points in point_buffer.

For arc: start angle of the arc (angle made between primary axis and the start of the arc segment).

argument_6 For line string or shape: a flag to indicate how edge lines should be placed.

Specify a 1 if edge lines are to appear from all vertices. Specify a 0 if edge lines are placed from the two end vertices only.

For arcs: the sweep angle of the arc segment. (For arcs, only two edge lines are placed, one from each end point of the arc).

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 63

Example In this example, a 2:1 semi-elliptical head is placed. The straight section is 24 inches, and the vessel diameter is 120 inches. Only two instances of the arc will appear --- one at 0 degrees, and another at 180 degrees (intermediate). straight_flange = 24 dia = 120 dish_depth = dia/4 Call Draw_Cylinder (straight_flange, dia) point_1 = point_0 ! save arc center Call Move_Along_Axis (dia/2, SECONDARY) point_2 = point_0 ! point for arc primary point_0 = point_1 ! for next move_along Call Move_Along_Axis (dish_depth, PRIMARY) point_3 = point_0 ! define arc secondary total_sweep = 360 arc_sweep = 90 ! quadrant arc rotating Call Draw_Revolved_Shape (EL_ARC, total_sweep, 2, POINT_1, 0, arc_sweep)

If you are rotating an arc, refer to the Draw Arc section for proper specifications of start and sweep angles.

Draw Shape The Draw Shape primitive is a 2D call allowing you to place a planar closed shape.

Syntax Call Draw_Shape (no_vertex, point_buffer)

Options

no_vertex Supplies the number of vertices from 1 - 90.

point_buffer The location of the first vertex. The other vertices are found in succeeding locations. The system adds the last vertex to coincide with the first vertex and close the shape. Use global or local point buffers.

Eden Language Structure

64 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Example In this example, the call places a shape of 20 vertices in POINT [24] ... POINT [43]. Call Draw_Shape (20, point [24])

Draw Transitional Element The Draw Transitional Element primitive allows you to place a right transitional element with a point in the center of either the rectangular or circular face. The active orientation primary axis orients the projection direction. The secondary axis orients a side of the rectangular base.

Syntax Call Draw_Transitional_Element (length_sec, length_norm, length_proj, length_radius)

Options

length_sec The length of rectangular base along secondary.

length_norm The length of rectangular base along normal.

length_proj The length of projection.

length_radius The radius of circular face.

Example In this example, a transitional element with a base measuring 24 x 16 and a height of 30 subunits is placed along the active primary axis. The circular top is drawn with a radius of 6 subunits. After placement, the active point is updated from the face by which the shape was placed to the opposite end. Call Draw_Transitional_Element (24, 16, 30, 6)

Get Arc Points The Get Arc Points primitive allows you to access the data for the arc last identified in a Get Point call. The system ignores the secondary length of the arc, assuming it to be identical to the primary. This call is specifically geared to facilitate hand-railing placement.

Syntax Call Get_Arc_Points (arc_definition)

Options

arc_definition An output buffer of 4 points (global or local point buffer). The 4 points returned are (in order): center, one end point, an intermediate point, and the other end point of the arc. They allow the system to reconstruct the circular arc on arc-related calls where this definition must be input. The call will work properly as long as the identified arc is circular. The points are converted to the symbol (local) coordinate system before return.

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 65

Get Arc Size The Get Arc Size primitive returns the circumferential distance between two points on an arc.

Syntax Call Get_Arc_Size (arc_definition, from_pt, to_pt, length)

Options

arc_definition An input buffer of four points identifying a circular arc in local coordinates. The subroutine uses this argument to find the angular position or sweep of the arc segment about the center (first point). The center of the arc is then used with the FROM_PT argument to find trace radius.

from_pt An input identifying the starting point of measurement. It is also used to compute the radius of the circular arc. Global or local point.

to_pt An input identifying the end point of measurement. This point only establishes an ANGULAR position on the arc determined from the first two arguments. Thus, it may or may not be on the arc itself. Global or local point.

length The output variable containing the peripheral separation between FROM_PT and TO_PT.

The result is accurate as long as both FROM_PT and TO_PT are within the sweep angle of the arc in ARC_DEFINITION. However, if a point is off the curve, the system will route the connection so as to include the arc's end nearer the off-point.

Example In this example, the Get Point call forces a snap only -- to an arc. On return, the arc data is obtained with the second call. The length of the arc is then computed by sending the third call (the start point (point [3]), the end point (point [5]), and the arc itself). int2 ret_pt_type, ret_ele_type . . Call Get_Point (PT_SNAP, point [1], ret_pt_type, ret_ele_type, EL_ARC) Call Get_Arc_Points (point [2]) Call Get_Arc_Size (point [2], point [3], point [5], length)

Eden Language Structure

66 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Get Date The Get Date primitive allows you to retrieve the current system date into a character variable.

Syntax Call Get_Date (date_string)

Options

date_string The character variable receiving system date in the form: dd-mmm-yyyy

Example Call Get_Date (cstring_1) After this call, cstring_1 appears as: "22-JAN-1989"

Get EQP Category The Get EQP Category primitive allows you to obtain a valid label for a given category number.

Syntax Call Get_EQP_Category (catno, category, ret_code)

Options

catno (input) A number between 1-20.

category (output) The category label for the given subcategory number.

ret_code (output)

0 - if catno is valid 1 - if catno is invalid

Within this primitive, you can select from a displayed list of valid EQUIPMENT subcategories.

Example In this example, the code fragment obtains all available (20) category labels.

do i = 1, 20 Call Get_EQP_Category (i, cstring [i], irc) if (irc .ne. 0) then cstring [i] = ' ' ! blank out sub-category name end if end do

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 67

Get Line Size The Get Line Size primitive returns the straight line distance between two points.

Syntax Call Get_Line_Size (from_pt, to_pt, size)

Options

from_pt The start point of measurement. Use global or local point.

to_pt The endpoint of measurement. Use global or local point.

size The output variable containing the distance. This argument is always positive.

Example In the following example, the code fragment computes the distance between point_1 and point_2 through the previous Get Point calls: . . Call Get_Point (pt_snap, point [1]) Call Get_Point (pt_snap, point [2]) Call Get_Line_Size (point [1], point [2], distance) . .

Get Point The Get Point primitive allows you to get a point from the operator in addition to an identified element.

Syntax Call Get_Point (pnt_types, ret_pnt, ret_pnt_type, ret_ele_type, ele_types)

Options

pnt_types An INT2 variable mask dictating the types of input you can select. You can combine the following keywords to yield the INT2 result:

PT_RESET Return by selecting RESET (no point returned). PT_BORE Boresight location point. PT_SNAP Snap point. PT_PREC Key-in precision point.

Eden Language Structure

68 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

PT_EQPID Allows you to key-in the equipment name. The system returns its first datum point location, if it exists. Otherwise, it returns the place point of the first item placed for that equipment in the design file.

PT_NOZID Allows you to key in a NOZZLE ID. The system returns the location of its first connect point.

PT_3DB A 2-view data button. PT_ALL Contains the result obtained by adding all the above

point types. Any point type can be removed from this mask by subtraction.

When forming the mask, remember to use a keyword only once whether adding or subtracting.

ret_pnt A global or local point variable containing (on return) the operator-selected point. The design file coordinate system (global) point is transformed to the local coordinate system by using the point and axes of alignment between the two systems. Therefore, the orientation and location of the symbol placepoint must be established prior to this call. Also, the alignment parameters (placepoint location, orientation, global active point, global active orientation) must not be changed between Get Point calls. This can result in returned points not maintaining proper relativity. Use global or local point buffer.

ret_pnt_type An INT2 output variable that contains the type of the returned point. This variable can be tested against the above keywords. It is optional only if subsequent arguments are omitted.

ret_ele_type An INT2 output variable that contains the coded TYPE of the MicroStation element identified by a SNAP (see the PDS Equipment Modeling (PD_EQP) Reference Guide). It is optional only if subsequent arguments are omitted. It can be tested against these keywords to identify the type code:

EL_LINE line element EL_LINESTR line string EL_SHAPE shape EL_ELLIPSE ellipse EL_ARC arc EL_PTSTR point string EL_CONE cone

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 69

ele_types An INT2 mask obtained by combining (adding) a number of element type codes just listed. It dictates the types the operator can possibly identify. This variable is optional. If left off, all element types are allowed.

EL_ALL contains the combination of all the above type codes. One or more types can be removed from the mask by subtraction.

When forming the mask, remember to use a keyword only once whether adding or subtracting.

Example The following code segment enables the symbol to obtain an arc or a line from the operator using snap or precision key-in: int2 retpttype, reteletype . . Call Display_Message ('Identify arc or line') Call Get_Point (pt_snap+pt_prec, point [101], retpttype, reteletype, el_arc+el_line) if (retpttype .eq. pt_snap) then ! is it a snap point? if (reteletype .eq. EL_ARC) then ! an arc was snapped to . . else ! it must be EL_LINE . . endif else ! it must be precision . . endif

Move Along Arc The Move Along Arc primitive returns a destination point (after traversing a specified distance along a given arc) from a given point.

Syntax Call Move_Along_Arc (arc_definition, from_pt, to_pt, travel dist, out_pt)

Options

arc_definition An input buffer of four points identifying a circular arc in local coordinates. The subroutine uses it to find the angular position or sweep of the arc segment about the center (first point). The center of the arc and the from_pt are used to find the trace radius.

from_pt An input to identify the measuring start point. It is also used to compute the radius of the circular arc. Global or local point.

Eden Language Structure

70 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

to_pt An input to identify the measuring end point. This point only establishes an angular position on the arc determined from the first two arguments. Therefore, it may or may not be on the arc itself. Global or local point.

travel_dist An input to specify the peripheral traversal distance from from_pt to to_pt.

out_pt An output location containing the destination point. The direction of travel if either from_pt or to_pt is off. The curve is given by the connecting segment from from_pt to to_pt through the arc’s end nearer the off-point.

Example In the following example, the Get Point call forces the operator to snap only -- to an arc. On return, the arc definition is obtained in point_2 ... point_5. The length of the arc is then computed by sending the third call the center (point [2]), start (point [3]), the end (point [5]), and the arc itself. Finally, the middle point (point [10]) on the arc is calculated by moving along the arc from start (point [3]) toward the end (point [5]). The distance traveled is one-half the arc's size. int2 ret_pt_type, ret_ele_type . . Call Get_Point (pt_snap, point [1], ret_pt_type, ret_ele_type, el_arc) Call Get_Arc_Point (point [2]) Call Get_Arc_Size (point [2], point [3], point [5], length) Call Move_Along_Arc (point [2 ], point [3], point [5], length/2, point [10]) ! find the middle

Move Along Axis The Move Along Axis primitive is similar to the Move By Distance primitive except that Move Along Axis allows you to move the active point a specified distance along any specified axis of the active orientation.

Syntax Call Move_Along_Axis (distance, axis)

Options

distance Variable or constant that defines the distance by which the active point should be moved.

axis Keyword defining the axis along which the active point should be moved. Valid values for axis include:

PRIMARY NORTH SECONDARY SOUTH NORMAL UP

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 71

EAST DOWN WEST

Example In this example, the active point is moved 24 subunits in the east direction.

Call Define_Active_Orientation (NORTH, EAST) Call Move_Along_Axis (24., SECONDARY)

Eden Language Structure

72 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Move Along Line The Move Along Line primitive returns a destination point given the direction of travel, a starting point, and a distance of travel.

Syntax Call Move_Along_Line (from_line_end, to_line_end, from_pt, distance, to_pt)

Options

from_line_end The starting input point for computing the direction of travel. Global or local point.

to_line_end The ending input point for computing direction of travel. Global or local point.

FROM_LINE_END and TO_LINE_END merely determine the direction and not the actual path of travel.

from_pt The input point from which the travel begins. Global or local point buffer.

distance The input variable containing the distance of travel.

to_pt The output location variable containing the destination point. Use global or local point buffer.

Example In the following example, the code fragment finds the midpoint of the line segment obtained with two Get Point calls. . . Call Get_Point (pt_snap, point [1]) Call Get_Point (pt_snap, point [2]) Call Get_Line_Size (point [1], point [2], distance) distance = distance/2 Call Move_Along_Line (point_1, point [2], point [1], distance, point[3]) . .

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 73

Move By Distance The Move By Distance primitive allows you to move the active point along the primary axis of the active orientation.

Syntax Call Move_By_Distance (distance)

Options

distance Variable or constant that dictates how far along the primary the active point should be moved. Negative values can be used.

Examples In the following example, the active point is moved 24 subunits in the up direction:

Call Define_Active_Orientation (UP, WEST) Call Move_By_Distance (24.)

In this example, the active point is moved by the distance defined by the variable dimension_a. Call Move_By_Distance (dimension_a)

Move Data The Move Data primitive writes contents of a variable or expression into another variable.

Syntax Call Move_Data (source_item, destination_item)

Options

source_item A variable or expression from which data will be moved without conversion.

destination_item Variable into which data will be moved. Length of data moved is length of the shorter item. If destination_item is a character variable, each source_item byte must be ASCII (32 or more) before it is transferred. Otherwise, characters up to but excluding the first non-ASCII byte make up the destination_item.

This routine is mainly useful for the Read Table primitive where INPUT/OUTPUT contains CHARACTER fields. The following code segment shows how to access such data:

Eden Language Structure

74 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

input_1 = 20

Call Move_Data ('col3_key', INPUT_2) ! INPUT_2 is ASCII field

Call Read_Table ('TABLE_SO_AND_SO', INPUT, OUTPUT ! Read table

Call Move_Data (OUTPUT_4, CSTRING_1) ! output_4 from table is

! ... ASCII. Move it into

! ... global ASCII

! ... variable CSTRING_1

Move To Placepoint The Move To Placepoint primitive allows you to restore both the active point and orientation to that of a previously defined place point.

Syntax Call Move_To_Placepoint (pp)

Options

pp A keyword specifying the previously defined place point. Valid values include:

PP1 - PP10

Example In this example, place point 2 is defined with an orientation of primary pointing east and secondary pointing north. The call Move To Placepoint sets the active point at the location of placepoint 2 and restores the active orientation to east and north.

Call Define_Active_Orientation (EAST, NORTH) Call Define_Placepoint (PP2, POINT_0) . . . Call Move_To_Placepoint (PP2)

Place COG The Place COG primitive allows you to place the center of gravity (COG) for a piece of equipment. There can be at most two centers of gravity per piece of equipment, each designated by a different keyword. The call is ignored if no datum points are being placed for the piece of equipment since the location of the COG is relative to the first datum point. Define Datum Point for dp1 must be executed before or after this call. Graphics are not created for COGs. Only numeric offsets are stored with the datum point to indicate the location.

Syntax Call Place_Cog (cog_type, offset_x, offset_y, offset_z)

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 75

Options

cog_type Keyword specifying the type of center of gravity you want to place. If a cog type already exists, it is replaced with the new definition. The following keywords are accepted:

DRY OPERATING_1 OPERATING_2 LIFTING

offset_x Distance specifying the easting of the COG in the local coordinate system of the first datum point.

offset_y Distance specifying the northing of the COG in the local coordinate system of the first datum point.

offset_z Distance specifying the elevation of the COG in the local coordinate system of the first datum point.

Example In the following example, the code locates the dry cog for the equipment with easting, northing, and elevation at 10.0, 20.0, and 30.0 units from pnt[1] in the coordinate system of datum point 1:

location pnt[6] pnt [1] = 1 pnt [2] = 2 pnt [3] = 3 Call Define_Active_Orientation (WEST, NORTH) Call Define_Datum_Point (dp [1], pnt [1]) Call Place_Cog (DRY, 10.0, 20.0, 30.0)

Since the location and orientation of the first datum point is known, we see that in symbol local coordinates, the COG is at:

10.0 - 1 = 9.0 WESTING

20.0 + 2 = 22.0 NORTHING

30.0 - 3 =27.0 DOWN

Position Cursor The Position Cursor primitive allows you to position the cursor at an input field on the active symbol tutorial.

Syntax Call Position_Cursor (fieldno)

Options

fieldno A key-in field number on the active tutorial.

Eden Language Structure

76 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Put Field The Put Field primitive allows you to display a value in a tutorial field. It works similarly to default expressions. After the value is evaluated, it must correspond to the numeric/character data type defined for the field.

Syntax Call Put_Field (value, fldno, ret_code)

Options

value A variable or expression that evaluates to the value to be input to the field. Character fields must receive character data, and numeric fields must receive numeric data. No data conversion between the two types is performed, and such type mismatch causes errors.

fldno A field number on the active tutorial. Possible values are 1 - 200 (since only these fields are defined via TDF). Default computations are also performed if necessary as a result of ’fldno’ being defined.

ret_code [optional] A numeric variable to receive completion status of the call. If successful, a 0 is returned. Expect negative values if the call completes unsuccessfully. Such abnormal return may be possible due to:

Nonexistent field numbers. Incompatible type conversion. No tutorial being active.

Errors in computing defaults will be acknowledged only through system messages in the ’ER’ field.

By omitting it, you can ensure that the symbol execution is aborted if the call fails to successfully complete. In the case of computing defaults, the call successfully returns.

Example In the following example, the call puts out 10 in field #2 of the active tutorial. If DIMENSION_2 corresponds to field #2, it also receives a value of 10.0. Call Put_Field (10, 2)

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 77

Read Table The Read Table primitive allows you to read values from a table for use in your symbol definition. This process is called a table lookup. Refer to Reference Data Manager (PD_DATA) Reference Guide for information on the valid naming formats for tables and the valid units that can be used in tables.

Syntax Call Read_Table (table_name, INPUT, OUTPUT, return_code)

Options

table_name Name of the table to be read. This argument can be a string variable or constant.

INPUT The global variable name INPUT. Table input parameters must be defined prior to calling Read Table. The number and type of values needed in INPUT_1...INPUT_10 array depends on the number and type of input columns defined for the table. An INPUT_X parameter may be a number or a character string up to eight characters. Assigning numerical data to INPUT elements is not a problem. Character data, however, must be treated differently since INPUT is a REAL array. Characters cannot be assigned to its variables. You must use the Move Data primitive. Refer to the Move_Data primitive for sample usage.

OUTPUT Global variable name OUTPUT. The table values read are stored in OUTPUT. You must know the table structure in order to know where each output from the table is stored. An OUTPUT_X field can be numeric or alphanumeric (up to eight characters) depending on the table structure. Refer to the Move Data primitive for accessing character data once it is retrieved in an OUTPUT_X variable.

return_code [optional] The output argument allowing symbol execution to continue if the call fails to read a table. If supplied, the values returned include:

0 - table read successfully 3 - table not in table library / library not attached 6 - invalid inputs for table look-up.

Examples In this example, a table is read obtaining a flange diameter and thickness. The table name is

derived from character constants, the flange generic end prep, and the flange pressure rating. The table input is the flange nominal pipe size. The flange diameter is taken from global variable OUTPUT_1, while the flange thickness is taken from global variable OUTPUT_2. INPUT_1 = Nom_Pipe_D table = 'BLT' // GEN_TYPE // PR_RATING // '5' Call Read_Table (table, INPUT, OUTPUT)

Eden Language Structure

78 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

flange_diam = OUTPUT_1 flange_thk = OUTPUT_2

In this example, a table is read obtaining the outside diameter of a pipe given the nominal pipe diameter. INPUT_1 = Nom_Pipe_D Call Read_Table ('MAL_300_5', INPUT, OUTPUT) pipe_od = OUTPUT_3

Retrieve Nozzle Parameters The Retrieve Nozzle Parameters primitive allows you to make all parameters for a specified nozzle the active parameters.

Syntax Call Retrieve_Nozzle_Parameters (noznum)

Options

noznum The number that identifies the nozzle whose parameters are to be made active.

After a call to Retrieve Nozzle Parameters, the following global variables are defined with values for the nozzle identified by noznum:

END_PREP - the nozzle's end preparation PR_RATING - the nozzle's pressure rating NOM_PIPE_D - the nozzle's nominal pipe size NOZ_LENGTH1 - the nozzle's length (for type 2 and 3 only) NOZ_LENGTH2 - the nozzle's 2nd length (for type 3 only) NOZ_RADIUS - the nozzle's bend radius (for type 3 only) GEN_TYPE - the nozzle's generic end prep TERM_TYPE - the nozzle's termination type TABLE_SUFFIX - the current nozzle table suffix STD_TYPE - the current nozzle standard type

The method by which you can set these variables for each nozzle is discussed in the User Interface section. Once set, they can be activated in the symbol by calling Retrieve Nozzle Parameters.

Examples In this example, the nozzle parameters for nozzle number 3 are activated. Nozzle number 3

is then placed. Call Retrieve_Nozzle_Parameters (3) Call Define_Nozzle ('NOZ2', 3, 1)

In this example, any value you put in the global variable NOZ_LENGTH1 is overridden by the symbol. In this case, the nozzle projection or length is set to the vessel diameter plus 10 subunits. Call Retrieve_Nozzle_Parameters (5) NOZ_LENGTH1 = vessel_dia + 10. Call Define_Nozzle ('NOZ2', 5, 1)

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 79

Only NOZ_LENGTH1, NOZ_LENGTH2, NOZ_RADIUS, and TABLE_SUFFIX cbe calculated as in this example. All other nozzle parameters must be specified by input fields on a tutorial. NOZ_LENGTH1, NOZ_LENGTH2, NOZ_RADIUS, and TABLE_SUFFIX must be set after the call to Retrieve_Nozzle_Parameters.

an

If one of these values is set before the call, it will be lost when the call is made.

Rotate Orientation The Rotate Orientation primitive allows you to rotate the active local orientation relative to itself. The coordinate system is rotated about the designated axial direction through the specified angle according to the right-hand rule. When you call this primitive, you change the local symbol orientation without affecting the design file coordinate system.

Syntax Call Rotate_Orientation (angle, axis)

Options

angle Variable or constant that dictates the amount of rotation.

axis Keyword that defines the local axial direction about which to rotate. PRIMARY NORTH SECONDARY SOUTH NORMAL UP EAST DOWN WEST

Example After the last statement is executed, the new primary is oriented down. Call Define_Active_Orientation (EAST, NORTH) . . . . Call Rotate_Orientation (90, SECONDARY)

Eden Language Structure

80 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Start Complex Shape The Start Complex Shape primitive informs the system that linear elements (line, linestring, arc) to be placed subsequently are to be accumulated by the system and grouped as a complex shape. The elements must maintain a continuous flowline when they are sequentially traced through their vertices or end points. (This is a requirement for MicroStation complex shape elements.) The 0 only supplies a nonempty argument list.

Syntax Call Start_Complex_Shape (0)

Example call START_COMPLEX_SHAPE (0) Call Move_To_Placepoint (PP1) Call Define_Active_Orientation (NORTH,EAST) call draw_line (point [1], point [2]) call rotate_orientation (end_angle, normal) call draw_line (point [2], point [3]) Call Move_To_Placepoint (PP1) Call Define_Active_Orientation (NORTH,EAST) call draw_line (point [3], point [4]) call rotate_orientation (start_angle, normal) call draw_arc (inner_dia, inner_dia, 0.0, angle_sweep)! call STOP_COMPLEX_SHAPE (0)

Call Stop_Complex_Shape must be called to notify the system that the last element in the

complex shape has been defined. One complex shape can remain in effect for each BEGIN call category, and the system keeps

track of all such complex shapes. A default Stop Complex Shape is executed by the system following the element placed last inside a BEGIN category. Any number of complex shapes can be created in a category with pairwise start/stop calls.

Stop Complex Shape The Stop Complex Shape primitive informs the system that the complex shape under progress is complete.

One complex shape can remain in effect for each BEGIN call category, and the system keeps track of all such complex shapes. A default Stop Complex Shape is executed by the system following the element placed last inside a BEGIN category. Any number of complex shapes can be created in a category with pairwise start/stop calls.

Syntax Call Stop_Complex_Shape (0)

Example call START_COMPLEX_SHAPE (0) Call Move_To_Placepoint (PP1) Call Define_Active_Orientation (NORTH,EAST)

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 81

call draw_line (point [1], point [2]) call rotate_orientation (end_angle, normal) call draw_line (point [2], point [3]) Call Move_To_Placepoint (PP1) Call Define_Active_Orientation (NORTH,EAST) call draw_line (point [3], point [4]) call rotate_orientation (start_angle, normal) call draw_arc (inner_dia, inner_dia, 0.0, angle_sweep)! call STOP_COMPLEX_SHAPE (0)

Store Orientation The Store Orientation primitive allows you to store and recall orientations.

Syntax Call Store_Orientation (save_retrieve_flag, orientation_no)

Options

save_retrieve_flag The value indicating whether active orientation is:

being stored (=2) recalled (=1)

orientation_no The orientation location number. Valid values include: 1- 10 local orientation location (known to the current

symbol or user function only). 11- 20 global orientation location (known to all main

symbol and user function calls).

Example In this example, the call saves the active orientation into local orientation buffer 8. Later, the active orientation can be restored to its original value: Call Store_Orientation (2, 8) . . . Call Store_Orientation (1, 8)

Eden Language Structure

82 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Store Nozzle Parameters The Store Nozzle Parameters primitive allows you to make the active nozzle parameters the parameters for a specified nozzle. Before using this primitive, call the Define_Nozzle primitive to allow you to make modifications at a later time.

Syntax Call Store_Nozzle_Parameters (NOZNUM)

Options

noznum The number that identifies the nozzle whose parameters are to be initialized from the active parameters.

Example In the following example, the code allows you to modify the NOZ_LENGTH1 of nozzle number 3. (Refer to the Retrieve_Nozzle_Parameters primitive for more information on nozzle global variables affected by this primitive.)

Call Retrieve_Nozzle_Parameters (3) NOZ_LENGTH1=NOZ_LENGTH/2.0 Call Store_Nozzle_Parameters (3)

User Function The User Function primitive allows you to call another Eden module compiled as a user function. The User Function module is similar to a SYMBOL_PROCESSOR module, except the first statement reads: User_Function_Definition 'MODULE-NAME' where 'module-name' is a character string (1 to 20 characters) identifying the module being compiled. The User_Function call causes the system to retrieve and execute the module from the Eden library. Please note the following conventions: 1. The set of local variables in the calling module is completely separate from that in the called

module. Variables named the same between two modules do not share data or conflict with one another.

2. Data sharing can be done through the global variables as they are used in common. 3. Calls can be nested to any depth with a user function calling itself or other user functions.

Syntax Call User_Function (module-name, argument1, argument2,....argument9)

Options

module_name The name of user function to execute.

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 83

argument1 .. argument9 The numeric values to pass to the called user function. These are optional arguments and can be omitted from the right end. Values are passed via global variables INPUT_11 through INPUT_19. These are loaded from the optional arguments. Unused variables are zeroed out. INPUT_20 contains the number of optional arguments supplied.

OUTPUT_11 through OUTPUT_20 are zeroed out when a user function is called. They can also be used to pass results.

The modules are delivered with the Eden Interface allowing you to build certain common shapes not directly supported by any Eden primitive. These functions make use of the Draw Complex Surface primitive to create solid shapes by placing arcs and line strings individually. You can call these user functions much like any other Eden primitive by including arguments in the User_Function statement. You can obtain the source file name for a particular user function by adding the extension .UF to the function name.

User Function FLAT_OVAL_PRISM The FLAT_OVAL_PRISM user function allows you to place a flat oval prism with faces parallel but offset from each other along both the secondary and normal axes.

It is placed by a point in the middle of the first face. The active primary axis orients the direction of projection and the normal of both faces. The active secondary axis orients the flat sides of the faces.

Syntax Call User_Function ('FLAT_OVAL_PRISM', projlen, length1, depth1, length2, depth2, offset1, offset2, update_flg)

Options

projlen Length of projection.

length1 Flat segment length of first face.

Eden Language Structure

84 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

depth1 Depth of first face.

length2 Flat side length of second face.

depth2 Depth of second face.

offset1 Offset of second face from the first face along the secondary axis.

offset2 Offset of second face from the first face along the normal axis.

update_flg 0: Don’t update active point and orientation upon exit (default).

1: Update active point and orientation to the opposite face upon exit.

User Function FLAT_OVAL_TOR The user function FLAT_OVAL_TOR allows you to place a flat oval torus.

It is placed by a point in the middle of the starting face. The active primary axis is the normal of the starting face. The active secondary axis points to the center of rotation, and the active normal axis is the axis of rotation.

Syntax Call User_Function ('FLAT_OVAL_TOR', bend_radius, sweep_angle, length, depth, face_angle, update_flg)

Options

bend_radius Distance from center of starting face to the center of rotation.

sweep_angle Revolved angle.

length Flat segment length of face.

depth Depth of face.

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 85

face_angle Angle between the flat side of the starting face and the secondary axis. (For a torus rotated about an axis parallel to the flat sides, this is 90 degrees. For a torus rotated about an axis parallel to the curved sides, this is 0 degrees.)

update_flg 0: Don’t update active point and orientation upon exit (default).

1: Update active point and orientation to the opposite face upon exit.

User Function FLAT_OVAL_SEG_TOR1 The FLAT_OVAL_SEG_TOR1 user function allows you to place a segmented flat oval torus.

It is placed by a point in the middle of the starting face. The active primary axis orients the direction of projection of the first segment and is normal to the first face of the first segment. The active secondary axis points to the center of rotation. Rotation occurs around the flat sides using the active normal as the axis of rotation.

Syntax Call User_Function ('FLAT_OVAL_SEG_TOR1', bend_radius, seg_angle, num_seg, length, depth, update_flg)

Options

bend_radius Length from center of rotation to middle of starting face (>0).

seg_angle Angle between segments (between 0 and 180 degrees as measured between two cross-sections).

num_seg Number of segments (between 2 and 30 inclusive).

length Flat segment length of face.

Eden Language Structure

86 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

depth Depth of face (half of this depth must be well within the bend_radius).

update_flg 0: Don’t update active point or orientation upon exit (default).

1: Update active point and orientation to the last face upon exit.

User Function FLAT_OVAL_SEG_TOR2 The FLAT_OVAL_SEG_TOR2 user function allows you to place a segmented flat oval torus.

It is placed by a point in the middle of the starting face. The active primary axis orients the direction of projection of the first segment and is normal to the first face of the first segment. The active secondary points to the center of rotation. Rotation occurs around the curved sides using the active normal as the axis of rotation.

Syntax Call User_Function ('FLAT_OVAL_SEG_TOR2', bend_radius, seg_angle, num_seg, length, depth, update_flg)

Options

bend_radius Length from center of rotation to middle of starting face (>0).

seg_angle Angle between segments (between 0 and 180 degrees as measured between two cross-sections).

num_seg Number of segments (between 2 and 30 inclusive).

length Flat segment length of face.

depth Depth of face (half of this depth must be well within the bend_radius).

update_flg 0: Don’t update active point or orientation upon exit (default).

1: Update active point and orientation to the last face upon exit.

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 87

User Function ROUND_SEG_TOR1 The user function ROUND_SEG_TOR1 allows you to place a segmented round torus.

It is placed by a point in the middle of the starting face. The active primary axis orients the direction of projection of the first segment and is normal to the first face of the first segment. The active secondary points towards the center of rotation, and the active normal defines the axis of rotation. Cylinders are used to represent the segments.

Syntax Call User_Function ('ROUND_SEG_TOR1', bend_radius, seg_angle, num_seg, radius, update_flg)

Options

bend_radius Length from center of rotation to middle of starting face (>0).

seg_angle Angle between segments (between 0 and 180 degrees as measured between two cross-sections).

num_seg Number of segments (between 2 and 30 inclusive).

length Flat segment length of face.

depth Depth of face (half of this depth must be well within the bend_radius).

update_flg 0: Don’t update active point or orientation upon exit (default).

1: Update active point and orientation to the last face upon exit.

HLINE in certain views may not work cleanly around the junction of segments placed with this user function. User function ROUND_SEG_TOR2, however, works correctly with HLINE even though it is more expensive in terms of design file space.

Eden Language Structure

88 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

User Function ROUND_SEG_TOR2 The user function ROUND_SEG_TOR2 allows you to place a segmented round torus.

It is placed by a point in the middle of the starting face. The active primary axis orients the direction of projection of the first segment and is normal to the first face of the first segment. The active secondary points towards the center of rotation, and the active normal defines the axis of rotation. Projected shapes are used to represent the segments.

Syntax Call User_Function ('ROUND_SEG_TOR2', bend_radius, seg_angle, num_seg, radius, update_flg)

Options

bend_radius Length between center of rotation and center of starting face (>0).

seg_angle Angle between segments (between 0 and 180 degrees as measured between two cross-sections).

num_seg Number of segments (at least 2).

radius Cross-sectional radius of any segment (this value must be well within the bend_radius).

update_flg 0: Don’t update active point or orientation upon exit (default).

1: Update active point and orientation to the last face upon exit.

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 89

User Function RECT_SEG_TOR The user function RECT_SEG_TOR allows you to place a segmented rectangular torus.

It is placed by a point in the middle of the starting face. The active primary axis orients the direction of projection of the first segment, and the normal of the first face of the first segment. The active secondary axis points to the center of rotation. The active normal defines the axis of rotation.

Syntax Call User_Function ('RECT_SEG_TOR', bend_radius, seg_angle, num_seg, length1, length2, update_flg)

Options

bend_radius Distance between center of rotation and center of first face (>0).

seg_angle Angle between segments (between 0 and 180 as measured between cross-sections).

num_seg Number of segments (at least 2; at most 30).

length1 Length of face along the secondary axis.

length2 Length of face along the normal axis.

update_flg 0: Don’t update active point and orientation upon exit (default).

1: Update active point and orientation to the last face upon exit.

Eden Language Structure

90 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

User Function RECT_FLAT_OVAL The user function RECT_FLAT_OVAL allows you to place a rectangular to flat oval transitional element with faces parallel but offset from each other along both the secondary and normal axes.

It is placed by a point in the middle of the rectangular face. The active primary axis orients the direction of projection and the normal of each face. The active secondary orients the flat sides of the flat oval shape.

Syntax Call User_Function ('RECT_FLAT_OVAL', projlen, length1, depth1, length2, depth2, offset1, offset2, update_flg)

Options

projlen Length of projection.

length1 Length of rectangular face along the secondary axis.

depth1 Depth of rectangular face along the normal axis.

length2 Flat segment length of flat oval face along the secondary axis.

depth2 Depth of flat oval face along the normal axis.

offset1 Offset of flat oval face from rectangular face along the secondary axis.

offset2 Offset of flat oval face from rectangular face along the normal axis.

update_flg 0: Don’t update active point or orientation upon exit (default).

1: Update active point and orientation to the flat oval face upon exit.

Eden Language Structure

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 91

User Function ROUND_RECT The user function ROUND_RECT allows you to place a round to rectangular transitional element with faces parallel but offset from each other along both the active secondary and normal axes.

It is placed by a point in the middle of the round face. The active primary axis orients the direction of projection and the normal of each face. The active secondary axis orients a flat side of the rectangular face.

Syntax Call User_Function ('ROUND_RECT', projlen, radius, width, depth, offset1, offset2, update_flg)

Options

projlen Length of projection.

radius Radius of round face.

width Width of rectangular face along the secondary axis.

depth Depth of rectangular face along the normal axis.

offset1 Offset of rectangular face from round face along the secondary axis.

offset2 Offset of rectangular face from round face along the normal axis.

update_flg 0: Don’t update active point and orientation upon exit (default).

1: Update active point and orientation to the rectangular face upon exit.

S E C T I O N 3

Creating a New Equipment Component

Setup for Equipment Before a new equipment component can be defined through Eden, the following items must be performed: 1. Log in to the server where the PDS project resides. 2. Create a directory for the equipment symbol definition files, for example:

c:\projects\custom\eqpsym 3. Create a directory for the tutorial definition files (TDF), for example:

c:\projects\custom\tdf 4. Create a directory for the graphic libraries, for example:

c:\projects\custom\libs 5. Copy the standard delivered equipment libraries into the created library directory, for

example: copy c:\win32app\ingr\pdeqp\*.l* c:\projects\proj1\libs\.

6. Access the Reference Database Defaults form, and define the node name and path to the directories previously defined. Start the PD_Shell main form. Select the project and select the Reference Data Manager option. Select the Default Project Control Data option. Key in the path and node name for the created directories.

Equipment Eden Path: c:\projects\custom\eqpsym\

Equipment Eden node: <server name>

TDF Table Path: c:\projects\custom\tdf\

TDF Table node: <server name>

7. Access the Database Library File Manager form, and define the node name and directory path for the graphic data and table libraries. When testing new libraries in a live project, it is recommended to enter them as Not Approved. From the main PDS form, select the Equipment Modeling option. Select the Database Library File Manager option. Make sure that the node name and directory paths for all libraries are pointing to the

right location. Also make sure that the library specifications are correct. For a U.S. standards project, the following specifications could be used:

Graphic Commodity Lib

zi_eqpms.lib

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 93

Creating a New Equipment Component

94 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Tutorial Definition Lib zi_tutlib.lib

The network address and directory paths for the previous two should be the ones specified in the sections above.

Piping Physical Data Lib

us_pcdim.l

Piping Standard Note Lib

std_note.l

Piping Job Spec Table us_pjstb.l

The network address and directory paths for the previous three can be the locations defined for the project through the Reference Data Manager option.

Cell Lib c:\win32app\ingr\pdeqp\dat\equip.cel

Forms Dir. c:\win32app\ingr\pdeqp\<blank>

The network address for the previous two should be a server to which all workstations running PDS can mount.

To revise an entry, follow these steps: 1. Identify the library to be checked. 2. Place the cursor at the beginning of the key-in field of the entry to correct. 3. Delete to the right of the cursor. 4. Key in the correct value and press the return key. 5. Accept the form when all the data for that single library is correct.

Default Project Control Data This form allows you to define the default location for common reference files used by the project (such as neutral files, report files, and library files). You can change these file locations during the operation of the applicable managers.

Creating a New Equipment Component

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 95

This form is accessed through reference data manager, not PD_EQP.

Operating Sequence 1. Select the field to be defined, and key in the location of the source files and the associated

node name. Piping Eden Path / Node The default location for the Eden source files.

Eden Table Path / Node The default location of the Dimension Table and Spec Table source files.

Piping Spec Path / Node The default location for the neutral files to be used to load the Specification/Material Reference Database.

Assembly Path / Node The default location for the Piping Assembly Language source files.

Standard Note Library The default location for the Standard Note (code list) source files.

Equipment Eden Path / Node

The default location for the Equipment Eden source files.

TDF Table Path / Node The default location for the Equipment table definition files.

Model Builder Path / Node

The default location for the model builder language source files.

2. Select the Confirm (√) button to accept any changes to the Project Control Data.

Creating a New Equipment Component

96 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Extracting Sample Modules When defining a new component, the first step is to have a sketch of the graphic symbol that will be used to represent that component. Since the equipment modeling software has various items from basic shapes to complex components available for placement, the Eden modules for existing equipment can be extracted and used as models to define new components. To extract the Eden modules for existing equipment, the item's symbol processor name has to be known. To retrieve the symbol processor name (also referred to as the component's Eden number), follow these steps: 1. Turn to Appendix E, Parametrics of this document. 2. Find the equipment parametric that would require the least number of modifications to make

it appear as the graphics that will represent the new item. 3. The Eden number appears listed between parenthesis next to the equipment parametric title

(for example, through Ladder A (A021)). Once the Eden number is known, you can extract the symbol processor for the existing item. To extract the Eden module for the symbol processor, follow these steps:

4. Select the Equipment Modeling option from the main PDS form. 5. Select the Graphic Library Manager option. 6. Select the Eden Data Management option. 7. Select the Extract option. 8. Identify the symbol processor from the form, and select Confirm (√).

The system places the extracted modules in the symbols directory, eqpsym (or equivalent), previously created during setup.

To create a new component's Tutorial Definition File (TDF), turn to the example in this document's first chapter or extract a sample TDF by following these steps: 1. Select the Equipment Modeling option from the main PDS form. 2. Select the Graphic Library Manager option. 3. Select the Tutorial Definition Data Management option. 4. Select the Extract option. 5. Identify the TDF from the form, and select Confirm (√).

The system places the extracted tables in the tdf directory created during setup.

Creating a New Equipment Component

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 97

Editing Modules After the Eden modules and TDF tables for existing components have been extracted, they can be used as models or modified as needed to make them generate a new component. It is recommended that the TDF and the form be created concurrently so that the symbol processor can be written to match the TDF and the form. Refer to the end of this chapter for information about form creation. To write user input into the database tables of equipment, the TDF table should include an entry for each attribute. Refer to the Equipment Eden Basics chapter to review the details about the TDF file.

Compiling New Modules To compile newly created Eden modules they should be loaded to the existing graphic commodity library. New modules are compiled as they are loaded. If everything is correct in the code and compilation is completed, the new modules are incorporated into the graphic commodity library.

Follow these steps to load and compile new Eden modules: 1. Select the Equipment Modeling option from the main PDS form. 2. Select the Graphic Library Manager option. 3. Select the Eden Data Management option. 4. Select the Add/Replace option. 5. Identify the symbol processor's file name from the form. (For the system to be able to

display new modules, their file name should have the .eqp extension.) 6. Select the Add/Replace Selected Files option.

The system compiles and loads the new Eden module. 7. If compilation errors occur, take note of the error messages, fix the symbol processor's file,

and then repeat the preceding steps.

To load a new component's Tutorial Definition File (TDF), follow these steps: 1. Select the Equipment Modeling option from the main PDS form. 2. Select the Graphic Library Manager option. 3. Select the Tutorial Definition Data Management option. 4. Select the Add/Replace option. 5. Identify the TDF from the form. (For the system to be able to display new TDF files, their

file name should have the .tdf extension.) 6. Select the Add/Replace Selected Files option.

The system loads the new TDF.

Creating a New Equipment Component

98 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Revising Modules After the Eden modules of a new component have been defined, place the new component in the equipment modeling environment to verify that it places correctly. Should the component not place correctly, follow these steps to revise the incorrect Eden module: 1. Select the Equipment Modeling option from the main PDS form. 2. Select the Graphic Library Manager option. 3. Select the Eden Data Management option 4. Select the Revise option. 5. Identify the symbol processor's file name from the form. 6. Select the Revise Selected File option.

The system brings the file up on the screen. 7. Proceed to make the needed changes. Then save the file, and exit the editor. 8. Use the Add/Replace option to reload and compile the file just edited. 9. Return to the equipment modeling environment, and test placing the new component.

To revise a new component's Tutorial Definition File (TDF), follow these steps: 1. Select the Equipment Modeling option from the main PDS form. 2. Select the Graphic Library Manager option. 3. Select the Tutorial Definition Data Management option. 4. Select the Revise option. 5. Identify the TDF from the form, and select Confirm (√).

The system displays the file. 6. Make the needed changes. Then save the file, and exit the editor. 7. Return to the equipment modeling environment, and test placing the new component.

Basic Use of Forms The DBACCESS product is used to create the forms needed to interact with the operator. When a new equipment item is defined through Eden some form customization may be required to make the new item accessible to the users. The fastest way to generate a new form or add a new option within an existing form is to copy and edit a standard delivered form. The following general procedure can serve as a guideline when creating a form that is to be linked to a new equipment item. Refer to the DBACCESS documentation for detailed information on using this product. 1. Create a working directory for modifying forms. This should be done on a workstation that

has PDS loaded, or that has access to the server where PDS products are loaded For example, c:\name\forms

2. Copy a form used to place an existing component to the new forms directory. (Notice that the name of the form is the same as the component's Eden number plus the .fb extension.) copy c:\win32app\ingr\pdeqp\forms\A001 forms\.

Creating a New Equipment Component

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 99

3. From the forms directory, access the DBACCESS interface. If you are familiar with the procedures used in piping and equipment modeling for identifying, accepting, and rejecting a selection using the mouse, you will find it easy to follow the prompts provided for each of the DBACCESS commands.

Input Fields Input fields can be used to collect several types of input: Dimensional input Angular input Integer input Nozzle dimensions Nozzle database attributes Equipment database attributes Character data input.

The system assigns a unique field number to each input field. The tutorial definition table relays to the Equipment Modeling product what input type corresponds to a particular field number.

System-Defined Field Numbers Field numbers 201 through 256 are reserved for system use. At present, nine of these reserved numbers have been defined:

201 Collects the place point by which a parametric is to be placed. If a field numbered 201 is placed on a tutorial, you can key in the place point number.

202 203 204 Collect and display the current active point. If fields with these numbers are placed on the tutorial, when the tutorial is activated, the active point (x, y, and z respectively) is displayed. You can also key in a new value for the active point into these fields. When a new active point is established by any other means, this display is automatically updated.

205 206 207 Collect the delta (x, y, and z respectively) from the current active point.

208 Defines the angle from site north to equipment 0 degrees. For vertical equipment, the angle between site north and equipment 0 degrees is measured with respect to the secondary axis of the orientation tee. The primary axis of the orientation tee always points up. For horizontal equipment, the angle between site north and equipment 0 degrees is measured with respect to the primary axis of the orientation tee. The secondary axis of the orientation tee always points up.

Creating a New Equipment Component

100 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

209 Defines the slope in terms of subunits per master unit of travel. The orientation tee is sloped from the horizontal with regard to sign. (An input of :6 in an English file would be interpreted as 6 inches per foot of travel and displayed in the tutorial as 6 in/ft.)

System-defined fields must be present in the tutorial definition table when they are present in a tutorial. You need only input the field number for these entries. All other columns in the table can be left blank or null. For example:

Example 201, , , , , '', '' or 201,0,0,0,0,'',''

Application Commands Equipment tutorials can contain application commands as well as input fields. The two most important application commands that appear on every tutorial are ACCEPT and EXIT.

ACCEPT Allows you to accept the data you keyed into the tutorial.

EXIT Allows you to exit a tutorial with or without saving any modifications. There are two types of application commands: user-defined and system-defined. System-defined application command numbers are predefined. User-defined application command numbers are calculated.

User-Defined Application Commands User-defined application command numbers are used only for moving the keyboard cursor to a specific input field. This is accomplished by using an application command number of 3000 plus the number of the input field. For example, the application command number needed to move the cursor to field 5 on the form would be 3005. A user-defined application command is usually placed physically on top of the input field to which it applies. Thus, if you want to move the cursor to a specific input field, you need only select that field with a <D>, and the cursor will move to that particular field. You can also select the field from the sketch on the form. There is no restriction on using a given application command number in more than one place on the form. It is possible to have one command on top of the input field and another located in some other area on the form.

Creating a New Equipment Component

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 101

System-Defined Application Commands The system-defined application command numbers are outlined as follows:

Command number

Description

4001 EXIT from tutorial

4002 ACCEPT tutorial inputs

4011 Place by place point 1

4012 Place by place point 2

4013 Place by place point 3

4014 Place by place point 4

4015 Place by place point 5

4016 Place by place point 6

4017 Place by place point 7

4018 Place by place point 8

4019 Place by place point 9

4020 Place by place point 10

4021 Orient active axis EAST

4022 Orient active axis NORTH

4023 Orient active axis UP

4024 Orient active axis WEST

4025 Orient active axis SOUTH

4026 Orient active axis DOWN

4031 Change axis of rotation

4032 Swap orientation

4033 Invert axis

COMMAND numbers 4021 through 4033 duplicate functions that are already on the

Equipment Modeling command menu. They are provided here strictly for convenience. The commands on the menu are still active when a form is active.

Creating a New Equipment Component

102 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

4051 to 4999 Application commands in this range have been set aside for terminated application command fields. If you select such a box with the data button, control returns to the symbol, which then decides how to handle the input. The information needed for the symbol as to the type and number of last input is saved by the system in global variables before return takes place. Refer to the DISPLAY_TUTORIAL primitive for more information.

Additional Features of the Form Interface While a symbol placement form is active you can adjust the active point by: Snapping to an existing graphic. Selecting a Precision Point command. Boresite locating a key point.

or you can adjust the active orientation by: Boresite locating a key point. Pressing <R> to rotate the active axis by 90 degrees. Selecting a Refresh Manipulation command.

All MicroStation 32 and PDS commands that manipulate views can be selected. However, before continuing with form selections after view manipulations, you must first press <R> to exit the view command. Refer to the PDS Equipment Modeling (PD_EQP) Reference Guide for more information on placing equipment.

S E C T I O N 4

Defining Symbols

The previous sections explained the tools that you need to completely define an equipment symbol. This section outlines the basic steps you need to follow using these tools to prepare a complete symbol definition. The definition of a simple horizontal drum will be developed to illustrate the concepts.

Basic Steps: 1. Determine what the component will look like and what primitive graphics elements you

want to use to create it. For example, you want to define a drum that is composed of a cylinder, 2 semi-elliptical heads, and 2 projected rectangles to represent the saddle type supports.

2. Determine what dimensional inputs should be required for placing a symbol based on availability. A symbol cannot be efficiently placed if, in order to provide inputs for a symbol, you perform hand calculations based on numbers from drawings. For the horizontal drum, you need the drum diameter, the tan-tan length of the drum, the support locations relative to a tangent line, and the support projection and thickness. Assume that the drum heads are 2:1 semi-elliptical and that the support width is .866 of the drum diameter.

3. Determine where place points are needed for the symbol and reasonable orientations for them. Again, consider the documents the symbol user is working from. Place points should be located on the equipment in places that can be located on a drawing that orients the equipment on the plot. On the drum, one reasonable place point location is at one of the tangent lines on the centerline. The place point orientation should be pointing inside the drum so that when the symbol is placed, the refresh tee primary will indicate the direction the symbol will be placed. In addition, the place point secondary axis should be oriented in the down direction so that the refresh tee secondary can be used to orient the supports. Another reasonable place point location on the drum is at the bottom center of one of the supports. At this place point, the primary points into the support, and the secondary orients the direction that the drum will be placed by pointing it at the other support.

4. Assign global variables to the input. This step allows design of the tutorial for the symbol. Variables should be assigned as follows: DIMENSION_1 - drum tan-tan length DIMENSION_2 - drum diameter DIMENSION_3 - tangent line to center of first support DIMENSION_4 - center of first support to center of second support DIMENSION 5 - support projection from drum centerline DIMENSION 6 - thickness of support saddle

5. Develop the symbol code. For the drum, the following code is needed:

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 103

Defining Symbols

104 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’HDRUM’ tutnam = ’HDRUM’ call DISPLAY_TUTORIAL (tutnam) tantan= DIMENSION_1 diameter = DIMENSION_2 support_1 = DIMENSION_3 support_2 = DIMENSION_4 supp_proj = DIMENSION_5 supp_thk = DIMENSION_6 dish_depth = diameter /4 supp_wdth = diameter * .866 call DEFINE_ACTIVE_ORIENTATION (WEST, DOWN) call DRAW_SEMI_ELLIPSOID (diameter, dish_depth) call DEFINE_ACTIVE_ORIENTATION (EAST, DOWN) call DEFINE_PLACEPOINT (PP1, ACTIVE_POINT) call DRAW_CYLINDER (tantan, diameter) call DRAW_SEMI_ELLIPSOID (diameter, dish_depth) call MOVE_TO_PLACEPOINT (PP1) call MOVE_BY_DISTANCE (support_1) call DEFINE_ACTIVE_ORIENTATION (DOWN, SOUTH) call DEFINE_POINT (POINT_1, ACTIVE_POINT, 0., 0., 0.) call DRAW_PROJ_RECTANGLE (supp_wdth, supp_thk, supp_proj) call DEFINE_ACTIVE_ORIENTATION (UP, EAST) call DEFINE_PLACEPOINT (PP2) call DEFINE_ACTIVE_POINT (POINT_1) call DEFINE_ACTIVE_ORIENTATION (EAST, DOWN) call MOVE_BY_DISTANCE (support_2) call DEFINE_ACTIVE_ORIENTATION (DOWN, SOUTH) call DRAW_PROJ_RECTANGLE (supp_wdth, supp_thk, supp_proj) STOP END Explanation: In the above example, the SYMBOL_PROCESSOR statement and the STOP and END statements of the symbol definition are required. The drum's orientation along the east-west axis of the symbol coordinate system is arbitrary. It can just as easily be oriented along the north-south axis. Building the drum is similar to building the same piece of equipment using primitives in graphics. First, locate the active point. Then set the active orientation. Finally, place the primitive. Movement of the refresh tee after placement of the primitive is analogous to movement of the active point after placement of graphics in the Eden definition.

6. Compile the symbol. 7. Create the form. 8. Create the tutorial definition table.

For the drum, the following table might be used:

1, 1, 1, , 2, ' ', 'LENGTH'

2, 1, 2, , 2, ' ', 'DIAMETER'

3, 1, 3, , 2, ' ', 'SUPP_1'

Defining Symbols

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 105

4, 1, 4, , 2, ’F1/5’, 'SUPP_2'

5, 1, 5, , 2, ’F1-F3’, 'SUPP_PRJ'

6, 1, 6, , 2, ’F2/2+10’, 'SUPP_THK'

7, 8, 1, , 2, ’6’, 'EQPNAME'

9. Insert the tutorial definition table into the tutorial definition library. 10. Test and debug the symbol. Three tutorials, provided and serviced by the system, can be of

use during debugging. DEBUG1 You can display this tutorial several times in a single symbol

allowing you to monitor variables DIMENSION_1 through DIMENSION_100 while a symbol is executing. This tutorial will also allow you to change values that are assigned to these variables.

DEBUG2 Allows you to monitor and change all of the variables associated with nozzles. You can also display this tutorial several times.

DEBUG3 Allows you to monitor the active point, active orientation, and all of the point buffers.

11. To activate the debug tutorials, place the following call in your symbol definition: Call DISPLAY_TUTORIAL ('DEBUGn') where n = 1, 2, or 3.

12. If you want to debug the symbol interactively, call up the symbolic Eden Debugger when the symbol executes.

Defining Symbols

106 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

S E C T I O N 5

Eden Debugger

Debugging Eden symbols can be time-consuming depending on the length and complexity of the symbol. Sometimes it is necessary to study symbol execution source line by source line to track down a bug. This can involve examining the contents of critical variables undergoing modification. One way of locating a bug is by inserting temporary tracer calls in the DISPLAY_MESSAGE primitives. This allows you to display a variable and the location of the diagnostic. However, this method of debugging is disruptive, time-consuming, and can introduce more bugs into your symbol code. The Eden Debugger is part of the current Equipment Modeling software and can assist you in testing symbols efficiently and thoroughly. When using the Debugger, you can step through the symbol as it executes, examine or modify variables directly, and choose the source line number to execute next. All this can be done without modifying your original source code.

Invoking the Debugger You can activate the Debugger in the Start, Add, Modify, or Modify & Copy commands at the symbol name prompt or any time the symbol tutorial is active. To activate the Debugger, key in:

ON DEBUG If you key in ON DEBUG at the symbol name prompt and after a symbol name is accepted, the Debugger displays the source of the module and then prompts for the next input. If you key in ON DEBUG when the tutorial is active, the Debugger takes control after you return from the tutorial to the symbol. An arrow positioned by a source line indicates which line is to be executed next.

When the symbol form is active, you must key in the command from the MicroStation key-in field and not from a tutorial field.

Exiting the Debugger You can use the key-in OF DEBUG (off debug) to stop the debugger. This must be keyed in in the MicroStation Command Window.

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 107

Eden Debugger

108 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Concurrent Display Graphics resulting from symbol execution are not visible until you execute a Return/Stop/End statement. During debugging, it is sometimes useful to relate each DRAW call to the resulting graphics. For this reason, the concurrent display feature is provided. To display the graphics at the time of the CALL to a DRAW or PLACE routine, turn ON both the DEBUG and DISP mode. You can place the displayed graphics in the design file by keying in OF DISP just before the symbol code returns and the Eden buffer processing begins.

Debugger Commands The Debugger is not case sensitive except for the Call Tutorial command. Embedded blanks are compressed out from any input line before the line is interpreted. The Debugger currently supports the following functions:

Set Line Break (B) Call Tutorial (C) Deposit into Local Variable (DL) Deposit into Global Variable (DG) Examine Local Variables (EL) Examine Global Variables (EG) Examine Breaks (EB) Examine Symbol Name (ES) Move to Specific Source Line or Continue (Go) Access On-line Help (H) Step through Source Code (S) Step into User Function (SI) Switch the Prompt Terminal (P) Switch Modes (ON and OF) Examine Specific Source File Segments (Type)

Switch Modes (ON and OF) Switch statements begin with ON or OF commands. The ON command allows you to turn on the Debugger and the File Displayer mode of graphics placement.

Syntax ON DEBUG ON DISP OF DEBUG OF DISP

Options

DEBUG Invokes the Debugger.

DISP Allows only symbol execution graphics to be displayed (via FILE DISPLAYER) and to not be actually placed in the design file.

Eden Debugger

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 109

The switch commands are accepted: In the Start and Add command when the system prompts you for the primitive/parametric

name. At the MicroStation key-in field when a symbol tutorial is active. At a Debugger prompt.

Set Line Break (B) The Set Line Break command allows you to interrupt processing at a specified line. You can set up to 10 breaks per module. To examine the breaks set in the current module, key in E breaks or E b.

Syntax B lineno

Options

lineno A valid line number in the executing module. When the execution reaches the lineno, the debugger stops processing and prompts you for the next command.

Example The following example allows the Debugger to break at line 5.

b 5 To cancel this break, key in b -5.

Call Tutorial (C) You must exit these tutorials before the Debugger reprompts.

Syntax C DEBUGx

Options

x 1 Examines/modifies global variables DIMENSION_1..DIMENSION_100. 2 Examines/modifies nozzle attributes. 3 Examines/modifies active_point, active_orientation, and POINT_1

...POINT_24. The tutorial name must be in upper case.

Eden Debugger

110 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Deposit Global (DG) The Deposit Global command allows you to modify values of global DIMENSION variables.

Syntax DG dimension_# = value

Options

dimension_# A global variable 1 ... 100.

Example In the following example, the system places a value of 10.0 into DIMENSION_5:

DG 5 = 10.0

Deposit Local (DL) The Deposit Local command allows you to modify the values of local variables.

Only numeric type local variables can be modified.

Syntax DL variable = value

Options

variable The name of a local variable in the module.

Example In the following example, the system places a value of 20.0 into RADIUS:

DL RADIUS = 20.0

Examine Local Variables (EL) Syntax

EL var1:var2

Options

var1 var2

Alphanumeric character strings defining a valid lexical range of identifiers. The Debugger responds by listing the values of variables whose names are bracketed by var1 and var2.

Examples In the following example, the command keyin displays all the local variables whose names

start with A through Z: EL A:Z

Eden Debugger

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 111

To examine a single variable, you can drop the semicolon and var2. In the following example, the system examines only the variable radius: EL radius

The Debugger can display the entire array of 10 elements. In the following example, values is declared as R8 values [10]: EL values

In some cases, a local array may start from an element other than 1. The syntax establishes var1 as the name of the local array and var2 as the subscript from which to examine the array. In the following example, the Debugger allows you to examine lengths [4] ... lengths [10] of the array declared as R8 lengths [10]: EL lengths:4

Examine Global Variables (EG) The Examine Global Variables command allows you to review the global variables DIMENSION, POINT, CSTRING, PP, INPUT, and OUTPUT via the Debugger.

Syntax for DIMENSION Eg dimension_#1:dimension_#2 -OR- Eg dimension_#

Options

dimension_# dimension_#1 dimension_#2

numbers from 1 through 100

Example The following example displays the contents of DIMENSION_1 ... DIMENSION_5.

EG 1:5

Syntax for POINT EG PT x

Options

x Number from 1 through 125.

Example In the following example, the system displays the value of POINT [120] in subunits. The system also displays the coordinate system (6-point star) at POINT [x] location in design file coordinates.

EG pt 120

Syntax for CSTRING EG CSTR x

Eden Debugger

112 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Options

x Number between 1 and 40.

The string length in CSTRING_X is indicated by the space between the two double quotes ("---").

Example After executing the key-in CSTRING [2] = 'This is an example', you can examine cstring_2 by keying in EG cstr 2. The system displays: CSTRING_2: "This is an example". The lengths of strings stored in CSTRING variables are important for proper functioning of string operations such .EQ., .LE., .GT. and so forth.

Syntax for PP Eg PP x

Options

x A number between 0 and 10. The value for the particular placepoint is displayed in local coordinates while the refresh tee is shown at the placepoint's location in design file coordinates. When x is 0 (Eg pp0), the symbol active point and active orientation are displayed.

Syntax for INPUT and OUTPUT EG input EG output

Examine Symbol Name (ES) The Examine Symbol Name command allows you to display the symbol name or its source file. The system displays the full source file and module name.

Syntax E Source E s

Examine Source File Segments (TYPE) The TYPE command allows you to examine various segments of the source file.

Syntax T from_line# : to_line#

Options

from_line# Source line number from which the viewed segment starts.

to_line# Line number ending the viewed segment.

Eden Debugger

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 113

Examples The following example displays a window of source lines containing line#.

T line# The following commands display a source file segment containing only the current line.

T Type Displays a source file segment scroll bar containing the current line.

Move to Specific Source Line or Continue (Go) The Go command allows you to direct the DEBUGGER to a particular source line. The DEBUGGER goes directly to line# and displays a window of source lines around line#. The DEBUGGER prompts you for more input. This format of the Go command allows you to override the normal control flow and execute the source statements selectively. The Go command also allows the DEBUGGER to start executing from a current source line until it encounters a break.

Keying in Go and pressing a carriage return will break you out of the source code.

Syntax G line# or Go line#

Options

line# Valid executable source line number between 1 and 1500.

Step through Source Code (S) This command allows you to execute a number of statements in the usual order before the Debugger prompts you again.

Syntax S #_of_lines

Options

#_of_lines Number of lines you want to execute before being reprompted. If #_of_lines is 1, the #_of_lines parameter can be omitted.

Eden Debugger

114 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Step into User Function (SI) The Step into User Function command allows you to step into a user function module. The command is executed when the current-line arrow points to a "call USER_FUNCTION ('abcd')" statement. The screen is refreshed with source lines from the newly activated module. All commands are interpreted in the new context until a return/stop/end statement is executed. The DEBUGGER then returns to the calling module as does the control.

Syntax SI

Switch the Prompt Terminal (P) The Debugger accepts input from the form.

The current Start, Add, Modify, or Modify & Copy commands can be canceled during a Debugger prompt only when the prompt terminal is MicroStation.

Syntax P

A P P E N D I X A

Appendix: Codelist (CL330)

Use 2-199 for bolted types 300-399 for male types and 400-599 for female types. Refer to the Reference Data Manager (PD_DATA) Reference Guide for more information.

1 [Blank]

2 FE [Flanged end]

Use 11-15 for ends without integral gaskets and 16-19 for ends with integral gaskets.

10 FFTP Flat-face Flanged Termination tyPe (11-19)

11 FFFE Flat-Face Flanged End

16 FFFEWG Raised-Face Flanged End With integral Gasket

Use 21-25 for ends without integral gaskets and 26-29 for ends with integral gaskets.

20 RFTP Raised-face Flanged Termination tyPe

21 RFFE Raised-Face Flanged End

26 RFFEWG Raised-Face Flanged End With integral Gasket

Use 31-35 for ends without integral gaskets and 36-39 for ends with integral gaskets.

30 RJFTP RJT-face Flanged Termination tyPe (31-39)

31 RJFE RJT-face Flanged End

Use 41-45 for ends without integral gaskets and 46-49 for ends with integral gaskets.

40 TMFTP Tongue/Male-face Flanged Termination tyPe (41-49)

41 STFE Small-tongue-face Flanged End

42 LTFE Large-tongue-face Flanged End

43 SMFE Small-Male-face Flanged End

44 LMFE Large-Male-face Flanged End

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 115

Appendix: Codelist (CL330)

116 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Use 51-55 for ends without integral gaskets and 56-59 for ends with integral gaskets.

50 GFFTP Groove/Female-face Flanged Termination tyPe

51 SGFE Small-Groove-face Flanged End

52 LGFE Large-Groove-face flanged End

53 SFFE Small-Female-face Flanged End

54 LFFE Large-Female-face Flanged End

Use 61-65 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets and 66-69 for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets.

60 FFLFTP Flat-Face Lap-flanged Termination tyPe

61 FFLFE Flat-Face Lap-Flanged End

Use 71-75 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets and 76-79 for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets.

70 RFLFTP Raised-Face Lap-Flanged Termination tyPe

71 PFLFE Raised-Face Lap-Flanged End

Use 81-85 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets and 86-89 for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets.

80 RJFLFTP RTJ-Face Lap-Flanged Termination tyPe

81 RJLFE RTJ-Face Lap-Flanged end

Use 91-95 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets and 96-99 for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets.

90 TMFLFTP Tongue/Male-Face Lap-Flanged Termination tyPe (91-99)

91 STLFE Small-Tongue-Face Lap-Flanged End

92 LTLFE Large-Tongue-Face Lap-Flanged End

93 SMLFE Small-Male-Face Lap-Flanged End

Appendix: Codelist (CL330)

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 117

94 LMLFE Large-Male-Face Lap-Flanged End

Use 101-105 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets and 106-109 for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets.

100 GFFLFTP Groove/Female-Face Lap-Flanged Termination Type (101-109)

101 SGLFE Small-Groove-Face Lap-Flanged End

102 LGLFE Large-Groove-Face Lap-Flanged End

103 SFLFE Small-Female-Face Lap-Flanged End

104 LFLFE Large-Female-Face Lap-Flanged End

Use 111-115 for ends without integral gaskets and 116-119 for ends with integral gaskets.

110 FFTBTP Flat-Face Thru-Bolted Termination tyPe (111-119)

111 FFTBE Flat-Face Thru-Bolted End

116 FFTBEWG Flat-Face Thru-Bolted End With integral gasket

Use 121-125 for ends without integral gaskets and 126-129 for ends with integral gaskets.

120 RFTBTP Raised-Face Thru-Bolted Termination tyPe (121-129)

121 RFTBE Raised-Face Thru-Bolted End

126 RFTBEWG Raised-Face Thru-Bolted End With integral Gasket

Use 131-135 for ends without integral gaskets and 136-139 for ends with integral gaskets.

130 RJTBTP RTJ-face Thru-Bolted Termination tyPe (131-139)

131 RJTBE RTJ-face Thru-Bolted End

Use 141-145 for ends without integral gaskets and 146-149 for ends with integral gaskets.

Appendix: Codelist (CL330)

118 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

140 MRJTBTP Male RTJ-face thru-Bolted Termination tyPe (141-149)

146 MRJTBEWG Male RTJ-face thru-Bolted End With integral Gasket

Use 151-155 for ends without integral gaskets and 156-159 for ends with integral gaskets.

150 FFTBCSTP Flat-Face Thru-Bolted-with-Cap-Screws Termination tyPe (151-159)

151 FFTBCSE Flat-Face Thru-Bolted-with-Cap-Screws End

156 FFTBCSEWG Flat-Face Thru-Bolted-with-Cap-Screws End With integral Gasket

Use 161-165 for ends without integral gaskets and 166-169 for ends with integral gaskets.

160 RFTBCSTP Raised-Face Thru-Bolted-with-Cap-Screws Termination tyPe (161-169)

161 RFTBCSE Raised-Face Thru-Bolted-with-Cap-Screws End

166 RFTBCSEWG Raised-Face Thru-Bolted-with-Cap-Screws End With integral Gasket

Use 171-175 for ends without integral gaskets and 176-179 for ends with integral gaskets.

170 RJTBCSTP RTJ-face Thru-Bolted-with-Cap-Screws Termination tyPe (171-179)

171 RJTBCSE RTJ-face Thru-Bolted-with-Cap-Screws Ends

Use 181-185 for ends without integral gaskets and 186-189 for ends with integral gaskets.

180 FFFTBTP Flat-Full-Face Thru-Bolted Termination tyPe (181-189)

181 FFFTBE Flat-Full-Face Thru-Bolted End

186 FFFTBEWG Flat-Full-Face Thru-Bolted End With integral Gasket

Appendix: Codelist (CL330)

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 119

190 MJTP Mechanical Joint Termination tyPe (190-199)

191 MJE Mechanical Joint End

300 MTP Male Termination tyPe

301 BE Beveled End

311 TBE Tapered and Beveled End

321 MFE Male Flared End

331 MTE Male Threaded End

341 MGE Male Grooved End

351 MQCE Male Quick Connect Point

361 MFRE Male FerRule End

371 MHE Male Hose End

381 SPE SPigot End

391 PE Plain End (391-399)

393 3"FFPE 3" Field Fit Plain End

395 6"FFPE 6" Field Fit Plain End

400 STP Socket Termination tyPe (401-409)

401 SE Socket End

420 SWTP SocketWelded Termination tyPe (421-429)

421 SWE Socket End

440 FTTP Female Threaded Termination tyPe (441-449)

441 FTE Female Threaded End

460 FGTP Female Grooved Termination tyPe (461-469)

461 FGE Female Grooved End

480 FQCTP Female Quick Connect Termination tyPe (481-489)

481 FQCE Female Quick Connect End

Appendix: Codelist (CL330)

120 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

500 FFRTP Female FerRule Termination tyPe (501-509)

501 FFRE Female FerRule End

520 FHTP Female Hose Termination tyPe (521-529)

521 FHE Female Hose End

540 BLTP BeLl End Termination tyPe (541-549)

541 BLE BeLl End

590 HTP Hole end Termination tyPe (581-599)

591 HCE Circular Hole End

600 NTP Null Termination tyPe (600-605)

601 NE Null End

650 UDTP User Defined Termination tyPe (651-659)

651 UD User Defined end

When a UD preparation end is detected by the system in the piping materials class, it prompts you to define the actual CP preparation. The value you input is used for initial component placement as well as for subsequent re- creations of the piping system.

A P P E N D I X B

Appendix: Equipment Data Definition

The database containing the equipment data definition information is located in c:\win32app\ingr\pdeqp\ddl\eqp.ddl. Each piece of equipment in an equipment model is linked to a database record that contains nongraphic information about that piece of equipment. You can supply the nongraphic information before placing the item in the model or at placement time via input fields on the placement form. Each database (or database partition) is composed of a set of database tables which represent categories of data. A database table is a defined set of attributes that describe an item. An attribute is a single type of information to be stored about an item. Each attribute has a name which describes the piece of information to be stored. The actual information stored in the database is referred to as the attribute value. This value is a fixed data type: numeric, alphanumeric or code-listed. Numeric data types can be either real (decimal) or integer. These attributes are used for

quantitative values such as pressure or temperature. Alphanumeric data types (characters) are used for textual information such as equipment

item names or descriptions. Code-listed data types are special integer values which help standardize and speed up data

entry. A code list is a set of acceptable values for a particular attribute which can be referred to by an index number. By using the code list, you can enter the code-listed value instead of keying in all the characters each time a category is specified. A code listed attribute is an attribute whose value is defined using one of the selections from a particular code-list set.

The name of an equipment item is the most important nongraphic piece of data in the database concerning that equipment item. The equipment name is used by piping modelers to refer to a piece of equipment while routing pipe. The name must be defined before an equipment item can be placed in the model. In addition to the database record for the equipment item, there is also a database record for each nozzle on the equipment item. These records store essential data about the nozzles needed by PD_Design.

See Also Equipment Group Database Table (on page 121) Equipment Nozzle Database Table (on page 122)

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 121

Appendix: Equipment Data Definition

122 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Equipment Group Database Table The list of attributes for the equipment database table is displayed below. This list contains the attribute number, the attribute name, field description and, when necessary, the code-list number. # equip_group table number = 21, number of columns = 14 1 , equip_indx_no , integer 2 , equip_no , character(30) 3 , equip_descr_1 , character(40) 4 , equip_descr_2 , character(40) 5 , tutorial_no , character(6) 6 , equip_class , character(2) 7 , dry_weight , double 8 , oper_weight_1 , double 9 , oper_weight_2 , double 10 , insulation_thk , double 11 , construction_stat , short , standard note 130 12 , equipment_division , short , standard note 69 13 , approval_status , short , standard note 35 14 , insulation_purpose , short , standard note 220

If any of the double values are left undefined, -32768 is assigned as a value.

Equipment Nozzle Database Table The list of attributes for the nozzle database table is displayed below. This list contains the attribute number, the attribute name, field description and, when necessary, the code-list number. # equip_nozzle table number = 22, number of columns = 25 1 , nozzle_indx_no , integer 2 , nozzle_no , character(10) 3 , equip_indx_no , integer 4 , nominal_piping_dia , short 5 , rating , character(8) 6 , preparation , short , standard note 330 7 , piping_mater_class , character(16) 8 , unit_no , character(12) 9 , fluid_code , short , standard note 125 10 , unit_code , character(3) 11 , line_sequence_no , character(16) 12 , heat_tracing_reqmt , short , standard note 200 13 , heat_tracing_media , short , standard note 210 14 , insulation_purpose , short , standard note 220 15 , insulation_thk , double 16 , table_suffix , short , standard note 576 17 , service , character(20)

Appendix: Equipment Data Definition

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 123

18 , schedule_thickness , character(8) 19 , nor_therm_growth_X , double 20 , nor_therm_growth_Y , double 21 , nor_therm_growth_Z , double 22 , alt_therm_growth_X , double 23 , alt_therm_growth_Y , double 24 , alt_therm_growth_Z , double 25 , construction_stat , short , standard note 130

If any of the double values are left undefined, -32768 is assigned as a value.

Appendix: Equipment Data Definition

124 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

A P P E N D I X C

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

In This Appendix Example 1 (Use of loops) .............................................................. 125 Example 2 (Use of arrays and loops) ............................................. 126 Example 3 (Placing nozzles).......................................................... 126 Example 4 (Use of character string variables) ............................... 126 Example 5 (Graphic selection commands) .................................... 127 Example 6 ...................................................................................... 128 Example 7 ...................................................................................... 128 Example 8 ...................................................................................... 129 Example 9 ...................................................................................... 129 Example 10 (Insulation Graphics) ................................................. 133

Example 1 (Use of loops) This example demonstrates passing arguments to a User_Function using global variables and also reading equipment tables with character inputs. ! ================================================================= ! ! USER_FUNCTION_DEFINITION ’PMPTBL’ ! ! ================================================================= ! SUBROUTINE TO RETRIEVE NEMA MOTOR DIMENSIONS FROM A TABLE BASED ! UPON NEMA MOTOR FRAME NUMBER. THE TABLE, NAMED NEMA_MOTOR_DATA, ! IS HELD IN THE "EQUIPMENT TABLES" LIBRARY. ! ! INPUTS- CSTRING [1] - NEMA MOTOR FRAME NUMBER ! DIMENSION_89 - INPUT FIELD NUMBER TO REPOSITION CURSOR IF ! ERROR ! DIMENSION_90 - ERROR MESSAGE FIELD NUMBER ! ! OUTPUTS- DIMENSION_91 - RETURN CODE (0=GOOD, NOT 0=BAD) ! DIMENSION_61 THRU DIMENSION_67 - TABLE OUTPUTS ! ! NOTE: THE NEMA MOTOR FRAME NUMBER IS A CHARACTER STRING, ! FOR EXAMPLE: "140T". IT WOULD BE ASSIGNED TO INPUT_1 USING ! THE MOVE_DATA CALL. ! ! ================================================================= ! msg_field = DIMENSION_90 input_field = DIMENSION_89 CALL MOVE_DATA (CSTRING_1, INPUTS [1]) if (INPUTS [1] .ne. ’ ’) then !not blank. Good sav_lib = ACT_LIB call DEFINE_LIBRARY (EQP_TABLES) !open new lib !symbol quits if !open error call READ_TABLE (’NEMA_MOTOR_DATA’, INPUT, OUTPUT) do i = 1, 6 !move table !outputs DIMENSION [60+i] = OUTPUTS [i] !into global vars enddo call DEFINE_LIBRARY (save_lib) !reopen commod lib !so that !nozzles will !place. else call DISPLAY_MESSAGE (’Invalid motor frame number’, msg_field) call MOVE_CURSOR (input_field) DIMENSION(91) = -2 endif

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 125

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

126 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

end

Example 2 (Use of arrays and loops) Initializing variables

DIMENSION_1 = 10 DIMENSION_2 = 10 . . . DIMENSION_10 = 10

Initializing variables using a Do loop do i = 1, 10 DIMENSION[i] = 10 enddo

Example 3 (Placing nozzles) Placing nozzles

location = DIMENSION_23 theta = DIMENSION_24 call DEFINE_ACTIVE_ORIENTATION (EAST, NORTH) call MOVE_TO_PLACEPOINT (PP1) call MOVE_ALONG_AXIS (PRIMARY, location) call DEFINE_ACTIVE_ORIENTATION (UP, EAST) call ROTATE_ORIENTATION (theta, NORMAL) call RETRIEVE_NOZZLE_PARAMETERS (20) call DEFINE_NOZZLE (’NOZ2’, 20, 1)

Placing nozzles using an array and Do loop R8 theta(20) LOCATION pnts(60) . . . do i = 1, 20 pntnum = 3*i - 2 call DEFINE_ACTIVE_POINT (pnts(pntnum)) call DEFINE_ACTIVE_ORIENTATION (UP, EAST) call ROTATE_ORIENTATION (theta(i), SECONDARY) call RETRIEVE_NOZZLE_PARAMETERS (i) if (NOM_PIPE_D .ne. 0) then call DEFINE_NOZZLE (’NOZ2’, i, 1) endif enddo

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 127

Example 4 (Use of character string variables) ! ! do while (.TRUE.) call DISPLAY_TUTORIAL (’INPUTS’) pump_type = CSTRING[1] !input field is data type 9 if (pump_type .eq. ’SS’ .or. pump_type .eq. ’ss’) then call USER_FUNCTION (’SIDESIDE’) stop endif if (pump_type .eq. ’TT’ .or. pump_type .eq. ’tt’) then call USER_FUNCTION (’TOPTOP’) stop endif if (pump_type .eq. ’TE’ .or. pump_type .eq. ’te’) then call USER_FUNCTION (’TOPEND’) end call DISPLAY_MESSAGE (’BAD PUMP TYPE: ’ || pump_type, 2) call DISPLAY_MESSAGE (’VALID TYPES ARE SS, TT AND TE ’, 3) enddo

Example 5 (Graphic selection commands) notdone = TRUE do while (notdone) call DISPLAY_TUTORIAL (’UPICK’) if (LAST_INP_TYPE .eq. APPLICATION_CMD) then appnum = LAST_INP_NUM - 4050 ! 4051-4075 for ! fields if (appnum .eq. 1) then call USER_FUNCTION (’AET’) stop endif if (appnum .eq. 2) then call USER_FUNCTION (’AES’) stop endif if (appnum .eq. 3) then call USER_FUNCTION (’AEU’) endif call DISPLAY_MESSAGE (’OPTION HAS NOT BEEN IMPLEMENTED YET’) else notdone = FALSE endif enddo

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

128 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Example 6 This example illustrates how a terminated key-in is used. To get a user input, perform some calculations using the input, and then display the results as default values in the tutorial. notdone = TRUE do while (notdone) call DISPLAY_TUTORIAL (’ATUT’) if (LAST_INP_TYPE .eq. USER_KEYIN) then ! input to terminated ! ... keyin field field_no = LAST_INP_NUM ! fld attrib is 3 or 4 if (field_no .eq. 3) then ! keyin was to field 3 length = DIMENSION [23] size = length /100. angle = DASIND (size) call PUT_FIELD (angle, 4, retcode) ! show default in tut endif if (field_no .eq. 5) then count = DIMENSION[45] height = count * 10. call PUT_FIELD (height, 6, retcode) !show default on tutor endif else notdone = FALSE endif enddo

Example 7 This example shows the Eden logic for the case when a tutorial selection results in a value being displayed in a tutorial field. done = 0 do while (done .eq. 0) call DISPLAY_TUTORIAL (’GETME’) if (LAST_INP_TYPE .eq. APPLICATION_CMD) then optnum = LAST_INP_NUM - 4050 if (optnum .eq. 1) then call DISPLAY_MESSAGE (’***’, 190) endif if (optnum .eq. 2) then call DISPLAY_MESSAGE (’***’, 191) endif if (optnum .eq. 3) then call DISPLAY_MESSAGE (’***’, 192) endif else done = 1 endif enddo

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 129

Example 8 This example shows how a tutorial selection can result in the display of a new tutorial. After the ACCEPT box on the new tutorial is selected, the initiating tutorial is redisplayed. The symbol is: el_finito = FALSE do while (.not. el_finito) call DISPLAY_TUTORIAL (’TUTONO’) if (LAST_INP_TYPE .eq. APPLICATION_CMD) then cmdno = LAST_INP_NUM - 4050 if (cmdno .eq. 1) then call DISPLAY_TUTORIAL (’TUTDOS’) endif else el_finito = TRUE endif enddo

Example 9 The tutorial below is used to collect input for a Simple Horizontal Vessel.

A010 1, 1, 1, , 4, ’ ’, ’LENGTH’ 2, 1, 2, , 4, ’ ’, ’DIAMETER’ 3, 1, 3, , 2, ’ ’, ’OFFSET’ 4, 1, 4, , 2, ’ ’, ’SUP_1_2’ 5, 1, 5, , 2, ’ ’, ’SUP_DIAM’ 6, 1, 6, , 2, ’ ’, ’SUP_HGHT’ 7, 1, 7, , 2, ’ ’, ’DSH_DPTH’

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

130 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

8, 1, 8, , 2, ’ ’, ’SUP_WIDTH’ 9, 1, 9, , 2, ’ ’, ’THICKNESS’ 10, 9, 1, , 3, ’ ’, ’TANK_STD’ 11, 7, 1, , 1, ’ ’, ’EQPNAM’ 202, 1, , , 1, ’ ’, ’ ’ 203, 1, , , 1, ’ ’, ’ ’ 204, 1, , , 1, ’ ’, ’ ’

The following tutorial is used to define the vessel center-of-gravity for the Simple Horizontal Vessel.

A011 1, 1, 10, , 1, ’ ’, ’OFFSET_PRI’ 2, 1, 11, , 1, ’ ’, ’OFFSET_SEC’ 3, 1, 12, , 1, ’ ’, ’OFFSET_NOR’

The following code is the Symbol Processor for ’HTANK’. It illustrates several useful Eden features in creating the tutorials previously mentioned such as handling terminated fields, declaring local point arrays for location data, and placing 2D complex shapes for generating shadows. To familiarize yourself with the logic, you will find it useful to step through the source code aided by the Debugger. The symbol (and the User Function) should be extracted from the delivered text library, recompiled, and then inserted into the object library. The recompilation process allows the Debugger to locate the source file on your system when the symbol ’HTANK’ is called up. SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’’HTANK’ ! Simple Horizontal Tank int2 accepted, finished, i location shd_pnt[12] accepted = 0 finished = 0 Do while ( finished .eq. 0 ) Do while ( accepted .eq. 0) Call Display_Tutorial ( ’’HTANK’, ’’A010’ ) if ( LAST_INP_TYPE .eq. APPLICATION_CMD ) then

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 131

INP_NUM .ge. 4073 ) then if ( LAST_INP_NUM .le. 4075 .and. LAST_. 4075 ) then if ( LAST_INP_NUM .eq

cstring[1]= ’’A’ else

. 4074 ) then if ( LAST_INP_NUM .eq cstring[l]= ’’B’ else

string[1]= ’’C’ c endif endif

! Defines dimensions 1-8 Call User_Function ( ’’STD_TANK’ ) else if ( LAST_INP_NUM .eq. 4072 ) then

Display_Tutorial ( ’’TNKCOG’, ’’A011’) Callf endi

endif else

then if ( LAST_INP_TYPE .eq. USER_KEYIN ) if ( LAST_INP_NUM .eq. 1 ) then dimension_3 = dimension_l / 5 dimension_4 = dimension_1 * 3 / 5 Call Put_Field ( dimension_3, 3 )

) Call Put_Field ( dimension_4, 4 else if ( LAST_INP_NUM .eq. 2 ) then

66 dimension_8 = dimension_2* .8_2/4 dimension_7 = dimension

INPUT_1 = dimension_1 sav_lib = ACT_LIB Call Define_Library ( EQP_TABLES )

DIAM_READINGS’, INPUT, OUTPUT ) Call Read_Table ( ’’THK_ dimension_5 = OUTPUT_1 dimension_6 = OUTPUT_2 Call Define_Library ( sav_lib ) do i = 5, 8

Put_Field ( dimension[i], i ) Call enddo else if ( LAST_INP_NUM .eq. 10 ) then

User_Function ( ’’STD TANK’) Callf endi

f endif endi

endif endif

E .ne. APPLICATION_CMD .and. LAST_INP_TYPE .ne. USER_KEYIN ) then if ( LAST_INP_TYPpted = 1 acce

f endienddo cylinder_length = dimension_1 cylinder_diameter = dimension_2 suppport_offset = dimension_3

4 supportl_support2 = dimension_5 support_width1 = dimension_

base_center = dimension_6 dish_depth = dimension_7 support_width2 = dimension_8 insulation_thick = dimension_9 env_diameter = cylinder_diameter + 2.0*insulation_thick

cylinder_length + 2*dish_depth + 2.0*insulation_thick env_length = finished = 1 if ( cylinder_length .lt. ( support_offset + supportl_support2 )) then

essage ( ’’Supports will be outside tank body’, 90 ) Call Display_Minished = 0 f

endif if ( dish_depth .lt. 0 ) then

( ’’Dish depth is to small’ || dish_depth, 90 ) Call Display_Message finished = 0

endif if ( finished .eq. l ) then

) Call Define_Active_Orientation ( EAST, UP Call Define_Placepoint ( PP1, POINT_0 ) Call Begin ( EQUIPMENT )

nder_diameter ) Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends ( cylinder_length, cyli Call Define_Placepoint ( PP2, POINT_0 )

dish_depth ) Call Draw_Semi_Ellipsoid ( cylinder_diameter, Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP1 ) Call Define_Active_Orientation ( WEST, DOWN )

er_diameter, dish_depth ) Call Draw_Semi_Ellipsoid ( cylind Call Move_to_Placepoint ( PP1 ) if ( env_length .ne. 0 .and. env_diameter .ne. 0 ) then Call Begin ( ENVELOPE_SAFETY_HARD ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( ( dish_depth + insulation_thick ), WEST )

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

132 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

ds ( env_length, env_diameter ) Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Enall Move_to_placepoint ( PP1 ) C

endif Call Begin ( EQUIPMENT ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( base_center, DOWN ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( support_offset, EAST ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP3, POINT_0 )

East ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( supportl_support2,ne_Placepoint ( PP4, POINT_0 ) Call Defi

do i = 3, 4 Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP[i] ) Call Define_Active_Orientation ( UP, WEST )

Draw_Proj_Rectangle ( support_widthl, support_width2, base_center ) Callenddo Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP1) Call Define_Datum_Point ( DP[1], POINT_0 )

NG, dimension[10], dimension[11], dimension[12] ) Call Place_COG ( LIFTI Call BEGIN ( SHADOW ) Call Start_Complex_Shape(0) Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP1 ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( base_center, DOWN ) Call Define_Active_Orientation ( SOUTH, WEST )

r/2, dish_depth, 0, 180 ) Call Draw_Arc ( cylinder_diamete Call Move_to_Placepoint ( PP1 ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( base_center, DOWN ) Call Define_Point ( shd_pnt[1], POINT_0, 0, -cylinder_diameter/2, 0 ) Call Define_Point ( shd_pnt[4], shd_pnt[1], 0, cylinder_diameter, 0 ) Call Define_Point ( shd_pnt[7], shd_pnt[4], cylinder_length, 0, 0 )

, 0, -cylinder_diameter, 0 ) Call Define_Point ( shd_pnt[10], shd_pnt[7]_pnt[7] ) Call Draw_Line ( shd_pnt[4], shd

Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP2 ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( base_center, DOWN ) Call Define_Active_Orientation ( NORTH, EAST )

epth, 0, 180 ) Call Draw_Arc ( cylinder_diameter/2, dish_d

], shd_pnt[1] ) Call Draw_Line ( shd_pnt[l0

Stop_Complex_Shape(0) Callf endi

o endd END The following code is the User Function routine for computing dimensions.

tion routine for computing dimensions. ! The following code is the User Func User_Function_Definition ’’STD_TANK’

ters dimension[l]-[9] and Tutorial Fields l-9 ! Defines parame int2 i

ring[l] .le. ’’C’ ) then if ( cstring[l] .ge. ’’A’ .and. cstCall Put_Field ( cstring[l], 10 ) if ( cstring[1] .eq. ’’A’ ) then Call Convert_Unit ( 144.0, ENGLISH, dimension_1 )

( 60.0, ENGLISH, dimension_2 ) Call Convert_Unit dimension_9 = 0 else if ( cstring[1] .eq. ’’B’ ) then Call Convert_Unit ( 192.0, ENGLISH, dimension_1 ) Call Convert_Unit ( 120.0, ENGLISH, dimension_2 )

, dimension_9 ) Call Convert_Unit ( 12.0, ENGLISH else if ( cstring[1] .eq. ’’C’ ) then Call Convert_Unit ( 480.0, ENGLISH, dimension_1 )

Call Convert_Unit ( 180.0, ENGLISH, dimension_2 ) Convert_Unit ( 6.0, ENGLISH, dimension_9 ) Call

f endi endif endif dimension_3 = dimension_1/5 dimension_4 = dimension_1*3/5 dimension_5 = dimension_1/8

imension_2/4 + dimension_9 dimension_6 = dimension_2/2 + d dimension_7 = dimension_2/4

= dimension_2*.866 dimension_8 do i = 1, 9

Put_Field ( dimension[i], i ) Call

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 133

ddo

en else

splay_Message ( ’’"||cstring[1]||"’ ||’ is not a valid standard’, 90 ) Call Dif endi

END

Example 10 (Insulation Graphics) You can now place soft insulation graphics using the Eden code for Parametrics. A new Begin category (ENVELOPE_INSULATION) needs to be created for each Eden equipment symbol, so that the below statement can be called to draw the insulation shape and place it on the same Active Model Category as Insulation Envelope. Call Begin (ENVELOPE_INSULATION)

EXAMPLE: Your existing Eden code will have to be modified to remove the placement of insulation on the physical level (if you have done that). Comment out the 1st line and add the 2nd line. ! vessel_od = vessel_id + 2.0 * vessel_thk vessel_od = vessel_id

Next, add the lines below before the STOP statement to draw the insulation. Call Begin (ENVELOPE_INSULATION) ssel_od = vessel_id + 2.0 * vessel_thk ve

ll Move_To_Placepoint ( PP1 ) Ca

place vessel shell !

If( vessel_length .gt. 0.0 .and. vessel_id .gt. 0.0 )then

Call Draw_Cylinder ( vessel_length, vessel_od ) Else

Call Abort(0) dif En

set parameters for Heads !

mension [90] = vessel_od Di

place head "E1" !

Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP1 ) ll Rotate_Orientation ( 180.0, NORMAL ) Ca

If( Cstring [1] .eq. '2TO1' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-2TO1' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+2TO1' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. 'CAP' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-CAP' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+CAP' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. 'F&D' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-F&D' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+F&D' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. 'HEMI' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-HEMI' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+HEMI' .or.

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

134 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Cstring [1] .eq. 'FLAT' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-FLAT' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+FLAT' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. 'NONE' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-NONE' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+NONE' )then Cstring [40] = Cstring [1] Else Cstring [40] = Cstring [31] Endif ch1 = Cstring [40] If( ch1 .eq. 'CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. '-CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. '+CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. 'DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. '-DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. '+DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. 'FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. '-FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. '+FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. 'TORC' .or. ch1 .eq. '-TORC' .or. ch1 .eq. '+TORC' .or. ch1 .eq. 'TORS' .or. ch1 .eq. '-TORS' .or. ch1 .eq. '+TORS' )then Dimension [91] = Dimension [50] Dimension [92] = Dimension [51] Dimension [93] = Dimension [52] Endif Call User_Function ( 'PLACE_HEAD' ) ! head "E2" Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP2 ) If( Cstring [2] .eq. '2TO1' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-2TO1' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+2TO1' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. 'CAP' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-CAP' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+CAP' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. 'F&D' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-F&D' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+F&D' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. 'HEMI' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-HEMI' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+HEMI' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. 'FLAT' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-FLAT' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+FLAT' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. 'NONE' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-NONE' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+NONE' )then Cstring [40] = Cstring [2] Else Cstring [40] = Cstring [32] Endif ch1 = Cstring [40] If( ch1 .eq. 'CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. '-CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. '+CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. 'DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. '-DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. '+DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. 'FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. '-FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. '+FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. 'TORC' .or. ch1 .eq. '-TORC' .or. ch1 .eq. '+TORC' .or. ch1 .eq. 'TORS' .or. ch1 .eq. '-TORS' .or. ch1 .eq. '+TORS' )then Dimension [91] = Dimension [55] Dimension [92] = Dimension [56] Dimension [93] = Dimension [57] Endif Call User_Function ( 'PLACE_HEAD' )

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 135

E245 Simple Horizontal Tank Example Below is the modified Eden code for E245 Simple Horizontal Tank to have insulation drawn. SYMBOL_PROCESSOR 'E245' ! Added statements to draw insulation ! #TYPE =Reactors,Horizontal drums,Press storage tanks,Incinerators/combustors,All equip #DESC =Simple Hor Cyl Equip ! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! ! E245 : Simple horizontal vessel supported on saddles ! ! ! APPLICATION COMMAND ! 4075 - HELP (SPECIFIC) ! 4074 - HELP (GENERAL) ! 4073 - DEFINE ! 4072 - DEFINE CG ! 4051 - RETURN (from help menu) ! 4052 - UPDATE DATE ! ! SYSTEM DEFINED COMMAND USED ! 4001 - EXIT ! 4002 - ACCEPT !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Int2 anch, accepted Location pointzero [3] ! pointzero = POINT_0 Dimension [100] = 0.0 accepted = 0 tutname = 'E245' Cstring [29] = 'E245' Call Get_Date( Cstring [38] ) ! Do While ( accepted .EQ. 0 ) Call Display_Tutorial ( tutname ) Call Put_Field( Cstring [29], 13 ) If( LAST_INP_TYPE .EQ. USER_KEYIN ) then If( LAST_INP_NUM .GE. 2 .AND. LAST_INP_NUM .LE. 12 ) then Call User_Function ( 'E245_CHECK' ) accepted = Dimension [100] Else accepted = 0

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

136 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Endif Else If( LAST_INP_TYPE .EQ. APPLICATION_CMD ) then if( LAST_INP_NUM .eq. 4075)then Call Display_Tutorial ( 'H245' ) accepted = 0 else if( LAST_INP_NUM .eq. 4074)then Call Display_Tutorial ( 'H200A' ) accepted = 0 else If( LAST_INP_NUM .eq. 4073)then Call User_Function ('E200') accepted = 0 Else If( LAST_INP_NUM .eq. 4072)then Call User_Function ('E201') accepted = 0 Else If( LAST_INP_NUM .eq. 4052 )then Call Get_Date( Cstring [3] ) accepted = 0 Else accepted =1 Endif Endif Endif Endif endif else accepted = 1 Endif Endif Enddo ! vessel_thk = Dimension [1] vessel_length = Dimension [2] vessel_id = Dimension [3] ! Two Lines below required for Insulation ! vessel_od = vessel_id + 2.0 * vessel_thk vessel_od = vessel_id ! cl_to_saddle = Dimension [4] tan_to_saddle = Dimension [5] saddle_to_saddle = Dimension [6] saddle_thk = Dimension [7] saddle_width = Dimension [8] anch = Dimension [9] Call Define_Active_Orientation ( EAST, UP )

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 137

! Define PLACE_POINTS and DATUM_POINTS Call Define_Placepoint ( PP1, POINT_0 ) Call Define_Datum_Point( DP [1], POINT_0 ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( vessel_length, PRIMARY ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP2, POINT_0 ) Call Define_Datum_Point( DP [2], POINT_0 ) Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP1 ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( tan_to_saddle, PRIMARY ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( - cl_to_saddle, SECONDARY ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP3, POINT_0 ) Call Define_Datum_Point( DP [3], POINT_0 ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( saddle_to_saddle, PRIMARY ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP4, POINT_0 ) Call Define_Datum_Point( DP [4], POINT_0 ) ! ! place graphics ! Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP1 ) ! place vessel shell If( vessel_length .gt. 0.0 .and. vessel_id .gt. 0.0 )then Call Draw_Cylinder ( vessel_length, vessel_od ) Else Call Abort(0) Endif ! ! set parameters for Heads Dimension [90] = vessel_od ! place head "E1" Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP1 ) Call Rotate_Orientation ( 180.0, NORMAL ) If( Cstring [1] .eq. '2TO1' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-2TO1' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+2TO1' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. 'CAP' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-CAP' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+CAP' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. 'F&D' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-F&D' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+F&D' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. 'HEMI' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-HEMI' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+HEMI' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. 'FLAT' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-FLAT' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+FLAT' .or.

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

138 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Cstring [1] .eq. 'NONE' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-NONE' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+NONE' )then Cstring [40] = Cstring [1] Else Cstring [40] = Cstring [31] Endif ch1 = Cstring [40] If( ch1 .eq. 'CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. '-CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. '+CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. 'DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. '-DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. '+DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. 'FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. '-FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. '+FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. 'TORC' .or. ch1 .eq. '-TORC' .or. ch1 .eq. '+TORC' .or. ch1 .eq. 'TORS' .or. ch1 .eq. '-TORS' .or. ch1 .eq. '+TORS' )then Dimension [91] = Dimension [50] Dimension [92] = Dimension [51] Dimension [93] = Dimension [52] Endif ! Call User_Function ( 'PLACE_HEAD' ) ! ! head "E2" Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP2 ) ! If( Cstring [2] .eq. '2TO1' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-2TO1' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+2TO1' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. 'CAP' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-CAP' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+CAP' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. 'F&D' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-F&D' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+F&D' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. 'HEMI' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-HEMI' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+HEMI' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. 'FLAT' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-FLAT' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+FLAT' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. 'NONE' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-NONE' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+NONE' )then Cstring [40] = Cstring [2] Else Cstring [40] = Cstring [32] Endif ch1 = Cstring [40] If( ch1 .eq. 'CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. '-CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. '+CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. 'DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. '-DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. '+DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. 'FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. '-FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. '+FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. 'TORC' .or. ch1 .eq. '-TORC' .or. ch1 .eq. '+TORC' .or.

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 139

ch1 .eq. 'TORS' .or. ch1 .eq. '-TORS' .or. ch1 .eq. '+TORS' )then Dimension [91] = Dimension [55] Dimension [92] = Dimension [56] Dimension [93] = Dimension [57] Endif ! Call User_Function ( 'PLACE_HEAD' ) ! place saddles If( Dimension [4] .gt. 0.0 .and. Dimension [7] .gt. 0.0 .and. Dimension [8] .gt. 0.0 ) then Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP3 ) If ( saddle_width .gt. 0 .and. saddle_thk .gt. 0.0 ) Then If( saddle_width .lt. vessel_od ) then dast = 0.25 * ( vessel_od * vessel_od - saddle_width * saddle_width ) saddle_length = cl_to_saddle - DSQRT ( dast ) + 1.0 else saddle_length = cl_to_saddle endif If( tan_to_saddle .gt. 0.0 .and. saddle_length .gt. 0.0 ) then Call Rotate_Orientation ( 90.0, NORMAL ) Call Draw_Proj_Rectangle ( saddle_thk, saddle_width, saddle_length ) Endif If( saddle_to_saddle .gt. 0.0 .and. saddle_length .gt. 0.0 )then Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP4 ) Call Rotate_Orientation ( 90.0, NORMAL ) Call Draw_Proj_Rectangle ( saddle_thk, saddle_width, saddle_length ) Endif EndIf Endif ! define CGs Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP1 ) Call Place_Cog (DRY, Dimension [71], Dimension [72], Dimension [73]) Call Place_Cog (OPERATING_1, Dimension [74], Dimension [75], Dimension [76]) Call Place_Cog (OPERATING_2, Dimension [77], Dimension [78], Dimension [79])

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

140 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP3 ) ! Draws the Insulation Call Begin (ENVELOPE_INSULATION) vessel_od = vessel_id + 2.0 * vessel_thk Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP1 ) ! place vessel shell If( vessel_length .gt. 0.0 .and. vessel_id .gt. 0.0 )then Call Draw_Cylinder ( vessel_length, vessel_od ) Else Call Abort(0) Endif ! ! set parameters for Heads Dimension [90] = vessel_od ! place head "E1" Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP1 ) Call Rotate_Orientation ( 180.0, NORMAL ) If( Cstring [1] .eq. '2TO1' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-2TO1' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+2TO1' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. 'CAP' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-CAP' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+CAP' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. 'F&D' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-F&D' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+F&D' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. 'HEMI' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-HEMI' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+HEMI' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. 'FLAT' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-FLAT' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+FLAT' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. 'NONE' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '-NONE' .or. Cstring [1] .eq. '+NONE' )then Cstring [40] = Cstring [1] Else Cstring [40] = Cstring [31] Endif ch1 = Cstring [40] If( ch1 .eq. 'CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. '-CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. '+CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. 'DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. '-DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. '+DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. 'FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. '-FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. '+FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. 'TORC' .or. ch1 .eq. '-TORC' .or. ch1 .eq. '+TORC' .or.

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 141

ch1 .eq. 'TORS' .or. ch1 .eq. '-TORS' .or. ch1 .eq. '+TORS' )then Dimension [91] = Dimension [50] Dimension [92] = Dimension [51] Dimension [93] = Dimension [52] Endif ! Call User_Function ( 'PLACE_HEAD' ) ! ! head "E2" Call Move_To_Placepoint ( PP2 ) ! If( Cstring [2] .eq. '2TO1' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-2TO1' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+2TO1' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. 'CAP' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-CAP' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+CAP' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. 'F&D' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-F&D' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+F&D' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. 'HEMI' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-HEMI' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+HEMI' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. 'FLAT' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-FLAT' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+FLAT' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. 'NONE' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '-NONE' .or. Cstring [2] .eq. '+NONE' )then Cstring [40] = Cstring [2] Else Cstring [40] = Cstring [32] Endif ch1 = Cstring [40] If( ch1 .eq. 'CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. '-CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. '+CONE' .or. ch1 .eq. 'DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. '-DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. '+DOME' .or. ch1 .eq. 'FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. '-FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. '+FLGD' .or. ch1 .eq. 'TORC' .or. ch1 .eq. '-TORC' .or. ch1 .eq. '+TORC' .or. ch1 .eq. 'TORS' .or. ch1 .eq. '-TORS' .or. ch1 .eq. '+TORS' )then Dimension [91] = Dimension [55] Dimension [92] = Dimension [56] Dimension [93] = Dimension [57] Endif ! Call User_Function ( 'PLACE_HEAD' ) STOP END

Appendix: EQP Eden Program Examples

142 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

A P P E N D I X D

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

The following pages display each parametric identified by its title and Eden code. For some parametrics, special instructions or important information accompany the graphic.

The nozzle parametrics, N205 - N410, are included in this appendix, but Appendix: Equipment Data Definition contains more information on nozzles. The following parametrics are delivered with the PDS Equipment Modeling product.

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 143

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

144 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

In This Appendix Circular Platform (A001) ............................................................... 145 Miscellaneous Platform (A003) ..................................................... 148 Holes for Platforms (A015) ........................................................... 150 Holes for Miscellaneous Platforms (A016) ................................... 152 Thru Ladder A (A021) ................................................................... 155 Thru Ladder Details (A029) .......................................................... 156 Side Ladder A (A031) ................................................................... 158 Side Ladder Details (A039) ........................................................... 159 Stairs A (A041) .............................................................................. 161 Handrail A (A051) ......................................................................... 163 Davit A (A061) .............................................................................. 165 Davit B (A063) .............................................................................. 166 Define (E200) ................................................................................ 168 Define Weights (E201) .................................................................. 169 Complex Vertical Cylindrical Equipment, Skirt (E205) ................ 171 Simple Vertical Cylindrical Equipment, Skirt (E210) ................... 173 Simple Vertical Cylindrical Equipment, Legs (E215) ................... 175 Spherical Equipment (E230) .......................................................... 177 Complex Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment (E240) ..................... 179 Simple Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment (E245) ........................ 181 Horizontal Shell and Tube Exchanger (E305) ............................... 183 Kettle Exchanger (E307) ............................................................... 186 Vertical Shell and Tube Exchanger (E310) ................................... 188 Exchanger Ends (E319) ................................................................. 190 Double Pipe Exchanger (E320) ..................................................... 192 Plate Exchanger (E325) ................................................................. 194 Air Cooler (E330) .......................................................................... 196 Induced Draft Air Cooler Bay (E332) ........................................... 198 Forced Draft Air Cooler Bay (E334) ............................................. 199 Horizontal Rotating Equipment and Driver (E405) ....................... 201 Vertical Rotating Equipment and Driver (E410) ........................... 203 E1 Ends (E905) .............................................................................. 205 E2 Ends (E906) .............................................................................. 206 E3 Ends (E907) .............................................................................. 207 Complex Vertical Cylindrical Equipment (N205) ......................... 208 Simple Vertical Cylindrical Equipment (N210) ............................ 209 Simple Vertical Cylindrical Equipment (N215) ............................ 209 Spherical Equipment (N230) ......................................................... 210 Complex Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment (N240) ..................... 210 Simple Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment (N245) ........................ 211 Horizontal Shell and Tube Exchanger (N305)............................... 211 Kettle Exchanger (N307) ............................................................... 212 Vertical Shell and Tube Exchanger (N310) ................................... 212 Double Pipe Exchanger (N320) ..................................................... 213 Plate Exchanger (N325) ................................................................. 213 Air Cooler (N330) .......................................................................... 214 Horizontal Rotating Equipment and Driver (N405) ...................... 214

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 145

Vertical Rotating Equipment and Driver (N410) ........................... 215 Gear Cover (U850) ........................................................................ 215 Round Torus Miter (U860) ............................................................ 217 Rectangular Torus Miter (U861) ................................................... 218 Vertical Oval Torus Miter (U862) ................................................. 219 Flat Oval Torus Miter (U863) ........................................................ 221 Flat Oval Prism (U870) ................................................................. 222 Flat Oval Torus (U880) ................................................................. 223 Rectangular 90 Cone Torus with Offset (U881) ............................ 225 User Projected Shape (USRPRJ) ................................................... 226

Circular Platform (A001)

The sweep defines the platform location (left [L] or right [R]) in relation to the ladder as

looking from the top view. For SEGMENT 1, the platform edge next to the ladder is parallel to the radial line located at

angle P1. All other edges are radial. Select the Define Holes option to define the various shape penetrations on the platform

surface using the Handrail A (A015) (see "Holes for Platforms (A015)" on page 150) form.

A001 Notes Specific to Form A001, Circular Platform SWEEP defines whether the platform is located to the right (R) or to the left (L) of the

ladder, as viewed from the top. For segment 1, the platform edge next to the ladder is parallel to the radial line located at

angle P1. All other platforms edges are radial. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

146 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equip group no

952 2 COMP 12 9 2 0 1 ’ ’ ;

953 3 DET 12 9 3 0 1 ’ ’ ;

954 4 P1 11 2 1 0 1 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P2 11 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P3 9 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

957 7 SWEEP 1 9 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

SEGMENT 1

959 9 OPT1 1 9 5 0 3 ’"A"’ ;Option

960 10 P15 13 1 15 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P16 13 1 16 0 3 ’ ’ ;

12 12 P17 11 2 17 0 3 ’ ’ ;

SEGMENT 2

13 13 OPT2 1 9 6 0 3 ’"A"’ ;Option

14 14 P25 13 1 25 0 3 ’ ’ ;

15 15 P26 13 1 26 0 3 ’ ’ ;

16 16 P27 11 2 27 0 3 ’ ’ ;

SEGMENT 3

17 17 OPT3 1 9 7 0 3 ’"A"’ ;Option

18 18 P35 13 1 35 0 3 ’ ’ ;

19 19 P36 13 1 36 0 3 ’ ’ ;

20 20 P37 11 2 37 0 3 ’ ’ ;

SEGMENT 4

21 21 OPT4 1 9 8 0 3 ’"A"’ ;Option

22 22 P45 13 1 45 0 3 ’ ’ ;

23 23 P46 13 1 46 0 3 ’ ’ ;

24 24 P47 11 2 47 0 3 ’ ’ ;

SEGMENT 5

25 25 OPT5 1 9 9 0 3 ’"A"’ ;Option

26 26 P55 13 1 55 0 3 ’ ’ ;

27 27 P56 13 1 56 0 3 ’ ’ ;

28 28 P57 11 2 57 0 3 ’ ’ ;

SEGMENT 6

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 147

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

29 29 OPT6 1 9 10 0 3 ’"A"’ ;Option

30 30 P65 13 1 65 0 3 ’ ’ ;

31 31 P66 13 1 66 0 3 ’ ’ ;

32 32 P67 11 2 67 0 3 ’ ’ ;

SEGMENT 7

33 33 OPT7 1 9 11 0 3 ’"A"’ ;Option

34 34 P75 13 1 75 0 3 ’ ’ ;

35 35 P76 13 1 76 0 3 ’ ’ ;

36 36 P77 11 2 77 0 3 ’ ’ ;

SEGMENT 8

37 37 OPT8 1 9 12 0 3 ’"A"’ ;Option

38 38 P85 13 1 85 0 3 ’ ’ ;

39 39 P86 13 1 86 0 3 ’ ’ ;

40 40 P87 11 2 87 0 3 ’ ’ ;

SEGMENT 9

41 41 OPT9 1 9 6 0 3 ’"A"’ ;Option

42 42 P95 13 1 95 0 3 ’ ’ ;

43 43 P96 13 1 96 0 3 ’ ’ ;

44 44 P97 11 2 97 0 3 ’ ’ ;

45 45 DATE 11 9 14 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

A001 A015 General place hole routine

a001.eqp a015a016.uf pl_holes.uf

a001_ck.uf a015a016_ck.uf

trapez.uf a015.tdf

a001.tdf A015.fb

A001.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

148 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Miscellaneous Platform (A003)

To form a skewed corner as indicated by the dashed lines, enter the two parameters (P#) that

make up the right angle corner (solid lines) in P11 and P12, respectively. For example, for a Type E platform enter the values for P1 and P8 in P11 and P12 to create the skewed corner.

Select the Define Holes option to define the various shape penetrations on the platform surface using the Handrail A (A016) (see "Holes for Miscellaneous Platforms (A016)" on page 152) form.

A003 Notes Specific to Form A003, Misc Platforms To allow access to the platform via a skewed ladder, enter in fields P11 and P12 the

parameters that define the skewed corner. For example, enter parameters "P1" and "P6" to define a skewed corner for a type B platform.

Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows: Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equip-ment group no.

952 2 COMP 12 9 2 0 1 ’ ’ ;

953 3 TYPE 1 9 3 0 1 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P1 14 1 1 0 3 ’ ’ ;

957 7 P2 14 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

958 8 P3 14 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P4 14 1 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 149

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

960 10 P5 14 1 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P6 14 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

12 12 P7 14 1 7 0 3 ’ ’ ;

13 13 P8 14 1 8 0 3 ’ ’ ;

14 14 P9 11 2 9 0 3 ’ ’ ;

15 15 P10 9 1 10 0 3 ’ ’ ;

16 16 P11 2 9 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;First leg of skewed corner

17 17 P12 2 9 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;Second leg of skewed corner

18 18 DATE 11 9 6 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

A003 A016 General place hole routine

a003.eqp a015a016.uf pl_holes.uf

a003_ck.uf a015a016_ck.uf

a003_type_e.uf a016.tdf

a003.tdf A016.fb

A003.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

150 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Holes for Platforms (A015)

In the OPT field, key in C for circular hole or R for rectangular hole.

Option E, elliptical hole, is not implemented at this time. All holes must appear either partially or completely within the platform.

A015 Notes Specific to Form A015, Holes for Circular Platforms Enter "C" for circular, "E" for elliptical, or "R" for rectangular hole. Option "E" is not

currently available. The user must ensure that the holes are partially or completely within the platform. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

HOLE 1

951 1 OPT1 1 9 21 0 3 ’"C"’ ;Option

952 2 P18 11 2 18 0 1 ’ ’ ;

953 3 P19 13 1 19 0 3 ’ ’ ;

954 4 P20 11 2 20 0 1 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P21 13 1 21 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P22 13 1 22 0 3 ’ ’ ;

HOLE 2

957 7 OPT2 1 9 22 0 3 ’"C"’ ;Option

958 8 P28 11 2 28 0 1 ’ ’ ;

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 151

959 9 P29 13 1 29 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P30 11 2 30 0 1 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P31 13 1 31 0 3 ’ ’ ;

12 12 P32 13 1 32 0 3 ’ ’ ;

HOLE 3

13 13 OPT3 1 9 23 0 3 ’"C"’ ;Option

14 14 P38 11 2 38 0 1 ’ ’ ;

15 15 P39 13 1 39 0 3 ’ ’ ;

16 16 P40 11 2 40 0 1 ’ ’ ;

17 17 P41 13 1 41 0 3 ’ ’ ;

18 18 P42 13 1 42 0 3 ’ ’ ;

HOLE 4

19 19 OPT4 1 9 24 0 3 ’"C"’ ;Option

20 20 P48 11 2 48 0 1 ’ ’ ;

21 21 P49 13 1 49 0 3 ’ ’ ;

22 22 P50 11 2 50 0 1 ’ ’ ;

23 23 P51 13 1 51 0 3 ’ ’ ;

24 24 P52 13 1 52 0 3 ’ ’ ;

HOLE 5

25 25 OPT5 1 9 25 0 3 ’"C"’ ;Option

26 26 P58 11 2 58 0 1 ’ ’ ;

27 27 P59 13 1 59 0 3 ’ ’ ;

28 28 P60 11 2 60 0 1 ’ ’ ;

29 29 P61 13 1 61 0 3 ’ ’ ;

30 30 P62 13 1 62 0 3 ’ ’ ;

HOLE 6

31 31 OPT6 1 9 26 0 3 ’"C"’ ;Option

32 32 P68 11 2 68 0 1 ’ ’ ;

33 33 P69 13 1 69 0 3 ’ ’ ;

34 34 P70 11 2 70 0 1 ’ ’ ;

35 35 P71 13 1 71 0 3 ’ ’ ;

36 36 P72 13 1 72 0 3 ’ ’ ;

37 37 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ’ ’ ;Equipment group no

38 38 DATE 11 9 27 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

152 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

A015

a015a016.uf

a015a016_ck.uf

a015.tdf

A015.fb

Holes for Miscellaneous Platforms (A016)

In the OPT field, key in C for circular hole or R for rectangular hole.

Option E, elliptical hole, is not implemented at this time. All holes must appear either partially or completely within the platform.

A016 Notes Specific to Form A016, Holes for Misc Platforms Enter "C" for circular, "E" for elliptical, or "R" for rectangular hole. Option "E" is not

currently available. The user must ensure that the holes are partially or completely within the platform. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 153

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

HOLE 1

951 1 OPT1 1 9 21 0 3 ’"C"’ ;Option

952 2 P18 14 1 18 0 1 ’ ’ ;

953 3 P19 14 1 19 0 1 ’ ’ ;

954 4 P20 11 2 20 0 1 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P21 13 1 21 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P22 13 1 22 0 3 ’ ’ ;

HOLE 2

957 7 OPT2 1 9 22 0 3 ’"C"’ ;Option

958 8 P28 14 1 28 0 1 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P29 14 1 29 0 1 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P30 11 2 30 0 1 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P31 13 1 31 0 3 ’ ’ ;

12 12 P32 13 1 32 0 3 ’ ’ ;

HOLE 3

13 13 OPT3 1 9 23 0 3 ’"C"’ ;Option

14 14 P38 14 1 38 0 1 ’ ’ ;

15 15 P39 14 1 39 0 1 ’ ’ ;

16 16 P40 11 2 40 0 1 ’ ’ ;

17 17 P41 13 1 41 0 3 ’ ’ ;

18 18 P42 13 1 42 0 3 ’ ’ ;

HOLE 4

19 19 OPT4 1 9 24 0 3 ’"C"’ ;Option

20 20 P48 14 1 48 0 1 ’ ’ ;

21 21 P49 14 1 49 0 1 ’ ’ ;

22 22 P50 11 2 50 0 1 ’ ’ ;

23 23 P51 13 1 51 0 3 ’ ’ ;

24 24 P52 13 1 52 0 3 ’ ’ ;

HOLE 5

25 25 OPT5 1 9 25 0 3 ’"C"’ ;Option

26 26 P58 14 1 58 0 1 ’ ’ ;

27 27 P59 14 1 59 0 1 ’ ’ ;

28 28 P60 11 2 60 0 1 ’ ’ ;

29 29 P61 13 1 61 0 3 ’ ’ ;

30 30 P62 13 1 62 0 3 ’ ’ ;

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

154 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

HOLE 6

31 31 OPT6 1 9 26 0 3 ’"C"’ ;Option

32 32 P68 14 1 68 0 1 ’ ’ ;

33 33 P69 14 1 69 0 1 ’ ’ ;

34 34 P70 11 2 70 0 1 ’ ’ ;

35 35 P71 13 1 71 0 3 ’ ’ ;

36 36 P72 13 1 72 0 3 ’ ’ ;

37 37 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ’ ’ ;Equipment group no

38 38 DATE 11 9 27 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

A016

a015a016.uf

a015a016_ck.uf

a016.tdf

A016.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 155

Thru Ladder A (A021)

The OPTION field defines a cage (C), no cage (N), or hoop (H) ladder. If you enter H, only

the lower hoop is displayed. An interference envelope representing a cage is generated regardless of whether or not you

specify a cage. To define ladder and cage details, select the Define Details option using the Thru Ladder

Details (A029) form.

A021 Notes Specific to Form A021, Thru Ladder A OPTION defines whether cage (C), no cage (N), or hoop (H) option applies. For H, only the

lower hoop is displayed. Use the DEFINE DETAILS command to define ladder and cage details. An interference envelope representing the cage is generated regardless of whether there is a

cage or not. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equipment group no

952 2 COMP 12 9 2 0 1 ’ ’ ;

953 3 DET 12 9 3 0 1 ’ ’ ;

954 4 OPTION

1 9 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;Option

955 5 P1 9 2 1 0 3 ’0.0’ ;

956 6 P2 14 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

957 7 P3 14 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

156 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

958 8 P4 9 1 4 0 3 ’2.0’ ;

959 9 P5 11 2 5 0 1 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P6 14 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 DATE 11 9 5 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

A021

a021.eqp

a021_ck.uf

a021.tdf

A021.fb

Thru Ladder Details (A029)

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 157

When you select the Define Details option on the Thru Ladder A (A021) form, the Details form appears. Select the ACCEPT option to accept the current modification and return to the Thru Ladder A form. Select the EXIT option to ignore the current modifications and return to the parametric main menu.

A029 Notes Specific to Form A029, Thru Ladder Dtls The following values are hardcoded:

The rails as 3" X 3/8" bars. The rungs as 3/4" diameter cylinders. The hoop bars as 3" X 1/4" bars. The vertical bars as 1-1/4" X 1/4" bars.

Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows: Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

957 7 P20 12 1 20 0 3 '18.75'

;

958 8 P21 12 1 21 0 3 ’12.0’ ;

959 9 P22 12 1 22 0 3 ’42.0’ ;

960 10 P23 12 1 23 0 3 ’90.0’ ;

11 11 P24 12 1 24 0 3 ’48.0’ ;

12 12 P25 12 1 25 0 3 ’13.5’ ;

13 13 P26 12 1 26 0 3 ’13.5’ ;

14 14 P27 12 1 27 0 3 ’17.5’ ;

15 15 P28 9 2 28 0 3 ’40.0’ ;

16 16 P29 9 1 29 0 3 ’7.0’ ;

17 17 DATE 11 9 10 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

A029

a029.eqp

a029_ck.uf

a029.tdf

A029.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

158 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Side Ladder A (A031)

The OPTION field defines a cage (C), no cage (N), or hoop (H) ladder. If you enter H, only

the lower hoop is displayed. An interference envelope representing a cage is generated regardless of whether or not you

specify a cage. To define ladder and cage details, select the Define Details option using the Side Ladder

Details (A039) form.

A031 Notes Specific to Form A031, Side Ladder A Refer to paragraph A031 for comments. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equipment group no

952 2 COMP 12 9 2 0 1 ’ ’ ;

953 3 DET 12 9 3 0 1 ’ ’ ;

954 4 OPTION

1 9 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;Option

955 5 P1 9 2 1 0 3 ’0.0’ ;

956 6 P2 14 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

957 7 P3 14 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

958 8 P4 9 1 4 0 3 ’2.0’ ;

959 9 P5 11 2 5 0 1 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P6 14 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 159

11 11 DATE 11 9 5 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

A031

a031.eqp

a031_ck.uf

a031.tdf

A031.fb

Side Ladder Details (A039)

When you select the Define Details option on the Side Ladder A (A031) form, the Details

form appears. Select the ACCEPT option to accept the current modification and return to the Side Ladder A form. Select the EXIT option to ignore the current modifications and return to the parametric main menu.

A039 Notes Specific to Form A039, Side Ladder Dtls The following values are hardcoded:

The rails as 3" X 3/8" bars.

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

160 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

The rungs as 3/4" diameter cylinders. The hoop bars as 3" X 1/4" bars. The vertical bars as 1-1/4" X 1/4" bars.

Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows: Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

957 7 P20 12 1 20 0 3 '18.75'

;

958 8 P21 12 1 21 0 3 ’12.0’ ;

959 9 P22 1 3 22 0 3 ’6’ ;

960 10 P23 9 1 23 0 3 ’2.0’ ;

11 11 P24 12 1 24 0 3 ’90.0’ ;

12 12 P25 12 1 25 0 3 ’48.0’ ;

13 13 P26 12 1 26 0 3 ’13.5’ ;

14 14 P27 12 1 27 0 3 ’13.5’ ;

15 15 P28 12 1 28 0 3 ’17.5’ ;

16 16 P29 9 2 29 0 3 ’40.0’ ;

17 17 P30 9 1 30 0 3 ’7.0’ ;

18 18 DATE 11 9 10 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

A039

a039.uf

a039_ck.uf

a039.tdf

A039.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 161

Stairs A (A041)

If you input a value for P10, the system places the top rail. If you input a value for P11, the system places the middle rail. If you input a value for P12 and P13, the corresponding posts and rails are hardcoded and

placed as 2-1/2 inch outside diameter cylinders.

A041 Notes Specific to Form A041, Stairs A Top rail is placed if P10 has a value other than blank. Mid rail is placed if P11 has a value other than blank. Posts are placed if P12 and P13 have a value other than blank. The posts and rails are

hardcoded as 2-1/2" OD cylinders. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equipment group no

952 2 COMP 12 9 2 0 1 ’ ’ ;

953 3 DET 12 9 3 0 1 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P1 9 1 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P2 9 1 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P3 13 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

12 12 P4 13 1 7 0 3 ’ ’ ;

13 13 P5 3 3 8 0 3 ’ ’ ;No of risers

14 14 P6 9 1 9 0 3 ’ ’ ;

15 15 P7 9 1 10 0 3 ’ ’ ;

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

162 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

16 16 P8 12 1 11 0 3 ’30.0’ ;

17 17 P9 10 1 12 0 3 ’-0.75’

;

18 18 P10 12 1 13 0 3 ’34.0’ ;

19 19 P11 12 1 14 0 3 ’17.0’ ;

20 20 P12 12 1 15 0 3 ’ ’ ;

21 21 P13 12 1 16 0 3 ’ ’ ;

22 22 P14 12 1 17 0 3 ’8.0’ ; Stringer depth

23 23 P15 9 1 18 0 3 ’2.25’ ; Stringer flange width

24 24 DATE 11 9 4 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

A041

a041.eqp

a041_ck.uf

a041.tdf

A041.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 163

Handrail A (A051)

The primary axis of the place point must point up and normal to the platform surface. The

secondary axis may point in any direction. The top and middle rails are placed as 2-1/2 inch outside diameter cylinders at the center of

the trajectory as specified using the Select Points option. Posts are placed as 2-1/2 inch outside diameter cylinders. A post is placed at the begin point

and another at the end point. Subsequent posts are then placed a specified distance (P3) from each intermediate (D1) point. Additional posts are placed in equal spacing so that the maximum distance between posts does not exceed P4.

Modification of the handrail definition after placement requires you to delete and redefine the handrail.

To identify the handrail connect points, select the Select Point option. Then, place a data point at the designated connect points.

For accurate connect points, verify that the Keypoint Snap Lock is OFF and the Project Snap Lock is ON.

A051 Notes Specific to Form A051, Handrail A The primary axis of the PP must point up and normal to the platform surface. The secondary

axis may point in any direction. Use the SELECT POINTS command to identify points for placement of the handrail. Top rails and mid rails are placed as 2-1/2 inch OD cylinders, at the center of the trajectory

described with the SELECT POINTS command. Posts are placed as 2-1/2 inch OD cylinders. One post is placed at the beginning and end

points. A post is also placed a distance P3 from each intermediate <Di> point. Additional

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

164 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

posts are placed in equal spacing so that the maximum distance between posts does not exceed P4.

Modification of the handrail definition after placement requires that the handrail be deleted and redefined.

Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows: Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equipment group no

952 2 COMP 12 9 2 0 1 ’ ’ ;

953 3 DET 12 9 3 0 1 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P1 12 1 2 0 3 ’42.0’ ;

957 7 P2 12 1 3 0 3 ’24.0’ ;

958 8 P3 12 1 4 0 3 ’12.0’ ;

959 9 P4 13 1 5 0 3 ’72.0’ ;

960 10 DATE 11 9 4 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

A051

a051.eqp

a051_ck.uf

a051.tdf

A051.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 165

Davit A (A061)

A061 Notes Specific to Form A061, Davit A A blank in the OD2 field omits the brace. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equipment group no

952 2 COMP 12 9 2 0 1 ’ ’ ;

953 3 DET 12 9 3 0 1 ’ ’ ;

954 4 CAP 5 3 1 0 3 ’ ’ ;Capacity

955 5 UNITCAP

4 9 4 0 1 ’ ’ ;Unit of capacity

956 6 OD1 12 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;Member 1 OD

957 7 OD2 12 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;Member 2 OD

958 8 P1 13 1 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P2 13 1 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P3 13 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P4 13 1 7 0 3 ’ ’ ;

12 12 DATE 11 9 5 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

166 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

A061

a061.eqp

a061_ck.uf

a061.tdf

A061.fb

Davit B (A063)

A063 Notes Specific to Form A063, Davit B A blank in the OD3 field omits the brace. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T221 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equipment group no

952 2 COMP 12 9 2 0 1 ’ ’ ;

953 3 DET 12 9 3 0 1 ’ ’ ;

954 4 CAP 5 3 1 0 3 ’ ’ ;Capacity

955 5 UNITCAP

4 9 4 0 1 ’ ’ ;Unit of capacity

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 167

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T221 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

956 6 OD1 12 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;Member 1 OD

957 7 OD2 12 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;Member 2 OD

958 8 OD3 12 1 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;Member 3 OD

959 9 P1 13 1 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P2 13 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P3 13 1 7 0 3 ’ ’ ;

12 12 DATE 11 9 5 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

A063

a063.eqp

a063_ck.uf

a063.tdf

A063.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

168 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Define (E200)

This form appears when you select the Define option while in one of the following forms.

E205 E307

E210 E310

E215 E320

E230 E325

E240 E330

E245 E405

E305 E410 Once you complete modifications, select the ACCEPT option to return to previous parametric form. Selecting the EXIT option ignores the current modifications and returns you to the parametric main menu.

E200 Notes Specific to Form E200, Define This form is used to define the attributes in the equipment group entity. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 DESC1 37 7 2 0 1 ' ' ;Description 1

952 2 DESC2 37 7 3 0 1 ’ ’ ;Description 2

953 3 INSTHK

9 7 9 0 1 ’ ’ ;Insulation thk

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 169

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

954 4 DATE 11 9 11 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E200

e200.uf

e200.tdf

E200.fb

Define Weights (E201)

This form appears when you select the Define Weights option in a parametric form.

E205 E307

E210 E310

E215 E320

E230 E325

E240 E330

E245 E405

E305 E410

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

170 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Once you complete modifications, select the ACCEPT option to return to previous parametric form. Selecting the EXIT option ignores the current modifications and returns you to the parametric main menu.

E201 Notes Specific to Form E201, Define Weights This form is used to define the weight attributes in the equipment group entity along with the

locations of the center of gravity (CG) for each type of weight. Weights considered are dry and operating.

Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows: Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

DRY

951 1 DRYWT 8 7 6 0 1 ’ ’ ;Empty weight

952 2 DRYOFFPRIM

15 1 71 0 1 ’ ’ ;Offset along PRIMARY

953 3 DRYOFFSEC

15 1 72 0 1 ’ ’ ;Offset along SECONDARY

954 4 DRYOFFNORM

15 1 73 0 1 ’ ’ ;Offset along NORMAL

OPERATING 1

955 5 OP1WT 8 7 7 0 1 ’ ’ ;Operating 1 weight

956 6 OP1OFFPRIM

15 1 74 0 1 ’ ’ ;Offset along PRIMARY

957 7 OP1OFFSEC

15 1 75 0 1 ’ ’ ;Offset along SECONDARY

958 8 OP1OFFNORM

15 1 76 0 1 ’ ’ ;Offset along NORMAL

OPERATING 2

959 9 OP2WT 8 7 8 0 1 ’ ’ ;Operating 2 weight

960 10 OP2OFFPRIM

15 1 77 0 1 ’ ’ ;Offset along PRIMARY

11 11 OP2OFFSEC

15 1 78 0 1 ’ ’ ;Offset along SECONDARY

12 12 OP2OFFNORM

15 1 79 0 1 ’ ’ ;Offset along NORMAL

13 13 DATE 11 9 12 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E201

e201.uf

e201.tdf

E201.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 171

Complex Vertical Cylindrical Equipment, Skirt (E205)

To define the ends of this form, key in 2TO1, CAP, CONE, DOME, F&D, FLAT, FLGD, HEMI,

NONE, TORC, or TORS in the input fields E1, E2, or E3. The appropriate End form (E905 (see "E1 Ends (E905)" on page 205), E906 (see "E2 Ends (E906)" on page 206) or E907 (see "E3 Ends (E907)" on page 207)) appears. Negative values define an inverted end.

You must define a minimum of one shell section. Four shell sections is the maximum that can be defined. For each section, you must specify both length and diameter.

Shell graphics (P1-E3) contain thickness. Support graphics (P13-DP) do not contain thickness.

Skirt or ring supports can be located with respect to DP2, DP3, or DP4. P16 must have a negative value to locate the support below the data point. If P13, P14, and P15 are not defined, the support is not placed.

Select the Define option to establish user specific definitions and insulation thickness using the Define (E200) form.

Select the Define Weights option to establish the empty and operational weights of the parametric using the Define Weights (E201) (on page 169) form.

When in an input field, entering a value of zero eliminates that section of the parametric.

E205 Notes Specific to Form E205, Complex Vert Cyl Equip A minimum of one and a maximum of four shell sections may be defined. For a section,

both its length and diameter must be specified. Shell graphics have the thickness added. Support graphics do not have the thickness added. For E1, E2, and E3, define the applicable of 2T01, CAP, CONE, DOME, F&D, FLAT,

FLGD, HEMI, NONE, TORC, or TORS. Use a negative sign to define an inverted end. If

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

172 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

additional details are required, the system will provide access to a secondary form. If revision of details is desired, re-entry of the applicable end type is required.

Either skirt or ring supports may be defined. If P13, P14, or P15 is not defined, the support will be omitted. The support may be located with respect to PP2, PP3, or PP4. P16 must have a negative value to locate the support below the PP.

Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows: Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equip group no

SHELL

952 2 P1 9 1 1 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 E1 5 9 1 0 3 ’"2T01"’

;

954 4 P2 14 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P3 14 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P4 14 1 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

957 7 P5 14 1 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;

958 8 P6 14 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P7 14 1 7 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P8 14 1 8 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P9 14 1 9 0 3 ’ ’ ;

12 12 E2 5 9 2 0 3 ’"NONE"’

;

13 13 P10 14 1 10 0 3 ’ ’ ;

14 14 P11 14 1 11 0 3 ’ ’ ;

15 15 P12 14 1 12 0 3 ’ ’ ;

16 16 E3 5 9 3 0 3 ’"NONE"’

;

SUPPORT

17 17 P13 14 1 13 0 3 ’ ’ ;

18 18 P14 14 1 14 0 3 ’ ’ ;

19 19 P15 14 1 15 0 3 ’ ’ ;

20 20 P16 15 1 16 0 3 ’ ’ ;Distance from PP to btm of

support

21 21 PP 1 3 17 0 3 ’2’ ;PP for support

22 22 TUTNO 4 7 4 0 1 ’"E205"’

;Form no

23 23 DATE 11 9 4 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

201 201 PP 1 1 0 0 1 ’1’ ;

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 173

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E205 End E1

End E2

End E3

General place head routine

Define Define Weights

e205.eqp

e905.uf e906.uf e907.uf pl_head.uf e200.uf e201.uf

e205_ck.uf

e905_ck.uf

e906_ck.uf

e907_ck.uf

pl_dome.uf e200.tdf e201.tdf

e205.tdf e905.tdf e906.tdf e907.tdf pl_torisph.uf E200.fb E201.fb

E205.fb E905.fb E906.fb E907.fb pl_toricon.uf

Simple Vertical Cylindrical Equipment, Skirt (E210)

To define the ends of this form, key in 2TO1, CAP, CONE, DOME, F&D, FLAT, FLGD, HEMI,

NONE, TORC, or TORS in the input fields E1 or E2. The appropriate End form (E905 (see "E1 Ends (E905)" on page 205) or E906 (see "E2 Ends (E906)" on page 206)) appears. Negative values define an inverted end.

Shell graphics (P1-E2) contain thickness. Support graphics (P4-DP) do not contain thickness.

Skirt or ring supports can be located with respect to DP2, DP3, or DP7. P16 must have a negative value to locate the support below the data point. If P4, P5, and P6 are not defined, the support is not placed.

Select the Define option to establish user specific definitions and insulation thickness using the E200 (see "Define (E200)" on page 168) Define (E200) form.

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

174 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Select the Define Weights option to establish the empty and operational weight of the parametric using the Define Weights (E201) (on page 169) form.

E210 Notes Specific to Form E210, Simple Vert Cyl Equip, Skirt Shell graphics have the thickness added. Support graphics do not have the thickness added. For E1 and E2, define the applicable of 2T01, CAP, CONE, DOME, F&D, FLAT, FLGD,

HEMI, NONE, TORC, or TORS. Use a negative sign to define an inverted end. If additional details are required, the system will provide access to a secondary form. If revision of details is desired, re-entry of the applicable end type is required.

Either skirt or ring supports may be defined. If P4, P5, or P6 is not defined, the support will be omitted. The support may be located with respect to PP2 or PP3. P7 must have a negative value to locate the support below the PP.

Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows: Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equip group no

SHELL

952 2 P1 9 1 1 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 E1 5 9 1 0 3 ’"2T01"’ ;

954 4 P2 14 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P3 14 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 E2 5 9 2 0 3 ’"2T01"’ ;

SUPPORT

957 7 P4 14 1 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

958 8 P5 14 1 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P6 14 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P7 14 1 7 0 3 ’ ’ ;Distance from PP to btm of

support

11 11 PP 1 3 8 0 3 ’2’ ;PP for support

12 12 TUTNO 4 7 4 0 1 ’"E210"’ ;Form no

13 13 DATE 11 9 3 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

201 201 PP 1 1 0 0 1 ’1’ ;

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 175

E210 End E1 End E2 General place head routine

Define Define Weights

e210.eqp e905.uf e906.uf pl_head.uf e200.uf e201.uf

e210_ck.uf e905_ck.uf e906_ck.uf pl_dome.uf e200.tdf e201.tdf

e210.tdf e905.tdf e906.tdf pl_torisph.uf E200.fb E201.fb

E210.fb E905.fb E906.fb pl_toricon.uf

Simple Vertical Cylindrical Equipment, Legs (E215)

To define the ends of this form, key in 2TO1, CAP, CONE, DOME, F&D, FLAT, FLGD, HEMI,

NONE, TORC, or TORS in the input fields E1 or E2. The appropriate End form (E905 (see "E1 Ends (E905)" on page 205) or E906 (see "E2 Ends (E906)" on page 206)) appears. Negative values define an inverted end.

Shell graphics (P1-E2) contain thickness. Support graphics (P4-DP) do not contain thickness.

Leg or lug supports can be located with respect to DP2 or DP3. P9 must have a negative value to locate the support below the data point. If P5, P6, P7, and P8 are not defined, the support is not placed. P5 specifies the number of supports (supports will be equally spaced).

Select the Define option to establish user specific definitions and insulation thickness using the Define (E200) (on page 168) form.

Select the Define Weights option to establish the empty and operational weight of the parametric using the Define Weights (E201) (on page 169) form.

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

176 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

E215 Notes Specific to Form E215, Simple Vert Cyl Equip, Legs Shell graphics have the thickness added. Support graphics do not have the thickness added. For E1 and E2, define the applicable of 2T01, CAP, CONE, DOME, F&D, FLAT, FLGD,

HEMI, NONE, TORC, or TORS. Use a negative sign to define an inverted end. If additional details are required, the system will provide access to a secondary form. If revision of details is desired, re-entry of the applicable end type is required.

Either leg or lug supports may be defined. Use P5 to specify number of supports; supports will be equally spaced. If P5, P6, P7, or P8 is not defined, the support will be omitted. The support may be located with respect to PP2 or PP3. P9 must have a negative value to locate the support below the PP.

Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows: Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equip group no

SHELL

952 2 P1 9 1 1 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 E1 5 9 1 0 3 ’"2T01"’

;

954 4 P2 14 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P3 14 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 E2 5 9 2 0 3 ’"2T01"’

;

SUPPORTS

957 7 P4 11 2 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

958 8 P5 2 3 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P6 13 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P7 12 1 7 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P8 12 1 8 0 3 ’ ’ ;

12 12 P9 14 1 9 0 3 ’ ’ ;Distance from PP to btm of support

13 13 PP 1 3 10 0 3 ’2’ ;PP for support

14 14 TUTNO 4 7 4 0 1 ’"E215"’

;Form no

15 15 DATE 11 9 3 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

201 201 PP 1 1 0 0 1 ’1’ ;

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 177

E215 End E1 End E2 General place head routine

Define Define Weights

e215.eqp e905.uf e906.uf pl_head.uf e200.uf e201.uf

e215_ck.uf e905_ck.uf e906_ck.uf

pl_dome.uf e200.tdf e201.tdf

e215.tdf e905.tdf e906.tdf pl_torisph.uf E200.fb E201.fb

E215.fb E905.fb E906.fb pl_toricon.uf

Spherical Equipment (E230)

Shell graphics (P1-P2) contain thickness. Support graphics (P3-P9) do not contain

thickness. P4 specifies the number of supports (supports will be equally spaced). If P4, P6, and P9 are

not defined, the supports will not be placed. When defining cylindrical legs, leave P7 blank.

Select the Define option to establish user specific definitions and insulation thickness using the Define (E200) (on page 168) form.

Select the Define Weights option to establish the empty and operational weight of the parametric using the Define Weights (E201) (on page 169) form.

E230 Notes Specific to Form E230, Spherical Equip Shell graphics have the thickness added. Support graphics do not have the thickness added.

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

178 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Use P4 to specify number of supports; supports will be equally spaced. If P4, P6, or P9 is not defined, the support will be omitted. For cylindrical legs, leave P7 blank.

Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows: Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ’ ’ ;Equip group no

SHELL

952 2 P1 9 1 1 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 P2 14 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

SUPPORTS

954 4 P3 11 2 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P4 2 3 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P5 14 1 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;

957 7 P6 12 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

958 8 P7 12 1 7 0 3 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P8 14 1 8 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P9 14 1 9 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 TUTNO 4 7 4 0 1 ’"E230"’

;Form no

12 12 DATE 11 9 1 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

201 201 PP 1 1 0 0 1 ’1’ ;

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E230 Define Define Weights

e230.eqp e200.uf e201.uf

e230_ck.uf e200.tdf e201.tdf

e230.tdf E200.fb E201.fb

E230.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 179

Complex Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment (E240)

To define the ends of this form, key in 2TO1, CAP, CONE, DOME, F&D, FLAT, FLGD, HEMI,

NONE, TORC, or TORS in the input fields E1, E2, or E3. The appropriate End form (E905 (see "E1 Ends (E905)" on page 205), E906 (see "E2 Ends (E906)" on page 206), or E907 (see "E3 Ends (E907)" on page 207) ) appears. Negative values define an inverted end.

Shell graphics (P1-P7) contain thickness. Support graphics (P8-SLPE) do not contain thickness.

If P4, P5, and P6 are not defined, the boot is not placed. If P9, P10, and P11 are not defined, the corresponding support(s) and stiffening ring(s) are

not placed. If P12 is not defined, all supports and their stiffening rings are not placed. If P8 and P13 are not defined, all supports are not placed. If P14 is not defined, all stiffening rings are not placed. The ANCH field defines which support will be anchored. The SLPE field defines the rise per foot around the selected place point for sloped

equipment. Select the Define option to establish user specific definitions and insulation thickness using

the Define (E200) (on page 168) form. Select the Define Weights option to establish the empty and operational weight of the

parametric using the Define Weights (E201) (on page 169) form.

E240 Notes Specific to Form E240, Complex Hor Cyl Equip Shell and boot graphics have the thickness added. Support graphics do not have the

thickness added. If P4, P5, or P6 is not defined, the boot will be omitted.

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

180 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

For E1, E2, and E3, define the applicable of 2T01, CAP, CONE, DOME, F&D, FLAT, FLGD, HEMI, NONE, TORC, or TORS. Use a negative sign to define an inverted end. If additional details are required, the system will provide access to a secondary form. If revision of details is desired, re-entry of the applicable end type is required.

If P9, P10, and/or P11 are not defined, the corresponding support(s) and stiffening ring(s) will be omitted.

If P12 is not defined, all supports and their stiffening rings will be omitted. If P8 or P13 is not defined, all supports will be omitted. If P14 is not defined, all stiffening rings will be omitted. The ANCH field defines which support will be anchored. The SLPE field defines the rise per foot about the selected PP for sloped equipment. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equip group no

SHELL

952 2 P1 9 1 1 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 E1 5 9 1 0 3 ’"2T01"’

;

954 4 P2 14 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P3 13 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 E2 5 9 2 0 3 ’"2T01"’

;

957 7 P4 14 1 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

958 8 P5 13 1 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P6 13 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 E3 5 9 3 0 3 ’"NONE"’

;

11 11 P7 11 2 7 0 3 ’ ’ ;

SUPPORTS

12 12 P8 13 1 8 0 3 ’ ’ ;

13 13 P9 13 1 9 0 3 ’ ’ ;

14 14 P10 14 1 10 0 3 ’ ’ ;

15 15 P11 14 1 11 0 3 ’ ’ ;

16 16 P12 12 1 12 0 3 ’ ’ ;

17 17 P13 13 1 13 0 3 ’ ’ ;

18 18 P14 13 1 14 0 3 ’ ’ ;

19 19 ANCH 1 3 15 0 3 ’ ’ ;Anchor end

20 20 TUTNO 4 7 4 0 1 ’"E240"’

;Form no

21 21 DATE 11 9 4 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

201 201 PP 1 1 0 0 1 ’1’ ;

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 181

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

209 209 SLOPE 13 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Slope

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E240 End E1 End E2 End E3 General place head routine

Define Define Weights

e240.eqp e905.uf e906.uf e907.uf pl_head.uf e200.uf e201.uf

e240_ck.uf

e905_ck.uf

e906_ck.uf

e907_ck.uf

pl_dome.uf e200.tdf

e201.tdf

e240_el.uf

e905.tdf e906.tdf e907.tdf pl_torisph.uf E200.fb

E201.fb

e240.tdf E905.fb E906.fb E907.fb pl_toricon.uf

E240.fb

Simple Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment (E245)

To define the ends of this form, key in 2TO1, CAP, CONE, DOME, F&D, FLAT, FLGD, HEMI,

NONE, TORC, or TORS in the input fields E1 or E2. The appropriate End form (E905 (see

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

182 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

"E1 Ends (E905)" on page 205) or E906 (see "E2 Ends (E906)" on page 206)) appears. Negative values define an inverted end.

Shell graphics (P1-E2) contain thickness. Support graphics (P4-SLPE) do not contain thickness.

If P5 and P6 are not defined, the corresponding support is not placed. If P4, P7, and P8 are not defined, all supports are not placed. The ANCH field defines which support will be anchored. The SLPE field defines the rise per foot around the selected place point for sloped

equipment. Select the Define option to establish user specific definitions and insulation thickness using

the Define (E200) (on page 168) form. Select the Define Weights option to establish the empty and operational weight of the

parametric using the Define Weights (E201) (on page 169) form.

E245 Notes Specific to Form E245, Simple Hor Cyl Equip Shell graphics have the thickness added. Support graphics do not have the thickness added. For E1 and E2, define the applicable of 2T01, CAP, CONE, DOME, F&D, FLAT, FLGD,

HEMI, NONE, TORC, or TORS. Use a negative sign to define an inverted end. If additional details are required, the system will provide access to a secondary form. If revision of details is desired, re-entry of the applicable end type is required.

If P5 or P6 is not defined, the corresponding supports will be omitted. If P4, P7, or P8 is not defined, all supports will be omitted. The ANCH field defines which support will be anchored. The SLPE field defines the rise per foot about the selected PP for sloped equipment. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equip group no

SHELL

952 2 P1 9 1 1 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 E1 5 9 1 0 3 ’"2T01"’

;

954 4 P2 14 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P3 13 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 E2 5 9 2 0 3 ’"2T01"’

;

SUPPORTS

957 7 P4 13 1 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

958 8 P5 13 1 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P6 14 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P7 12 1 7 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P8 13 1 8 0 3 ’ ’ ;

12 12 ANCH 1 3 9 0 3 ’ ’ ;Anchor end

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 183

13 13 TUTNO 4 7 4 0 1 ’"E245"’

;Form no

14 14 DATE 11 9 3 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

201 201 PP 1 1 0 0 1 ’1’ ;

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

209 209 SLOPE 13 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Slope

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E245 End E1 End E2 General place head routine

Define Define Weights

e245.eqp e905.uf e906.uf pl_head.uf e200.uf e201.uf

e245_ck.uf

e905_ck.uf e906_ck.uf pl_dome.uf e200.tdf e201.tdf

e245.tdf e905.tdf e906.tdf pl_torisph.uf E200.fb E201.fb

E245.fb E905.fb E906.fb pl_toricon.uf

Horizontal Shell and Tube Exchanger (E305)

If P7 and P8 are not defined, the expansion joint is not placed. P10 defines the bundle pulling area. The default is the value for P1. If P11 and P12 are not defined, the corresponding bottom support is not placed.

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

184 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

If P15 and P19 are not defined, the corresponding bottom or top supports are not placed. If P16 is not defined, all supports are not placed. If P17 and P18 are not defined, the corresponding top support is not placed. The ANCH field defines which support will be anchored. The SLPE field defines the rise per foot around the selected place point for sloped

equipment. Select the Define option to establish user specific definitions and insulation thickness using

the Define (E200) (on page 168) form. Select the Define Weights option to establish the empty and operational weight of the

parametric using the Define Weights (E201) (on page 169) form. Select the Define Channel option to define the ends for the exchanger using the Exchanger

Ends (E319) (on page 190) form.

E305 Notes Specific to Form E305, Hor S&T Exchanger Use the DEFINE CHANNEL command to define the exchanger ends. If P7 or P8 is not defined, the expansion joint will be omitted. Use P10 to define the bundle pulling area. It defaults to P1. If P11 or P12 is not defined, the corresponding bottom support will be omitted. If P15 or P19 is not defined, the corresponding bottom or top supports will be omitted. If P16 is not defined, all supports will be omitted. If P17 or P18 is not defined, the corresponding top support will be omitted. The ANCH field defines which support will be anchored. The SLPE field defines the rise per foot about the selected PP for sloped equipment. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equip group no

SHELL

952 2 P1 13 1 1 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 P2 13 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

954 4 P3 9 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P4 13 1 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P5 9 1 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;

957 7 P6 9 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

958 8 P7 13 1 7 0 3 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P8 12 1 8 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P9 13 1 9 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P10 13 1 10 0 3 ’F2’ ;

SUPPORTS

12 12 P11 13 1 11 0 3 ’ ’ ;

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 185

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

13 13 P12 13 1 12 0 3 ’ ’ ;

14 14 P13 12 1 13 0 3 ’ ’ ;

15 15 P14 12 1 14 0 3 ’ ’ ;

16 16 P15 13 1 15 0 3 ’ ’ ;

17 17 P16 13 1 16 0 3 ’ ’ ;

18 18 P17 13 1 17 0 3 ’ ’ ;

19 19 P18 13 1 18 0 3 ’ ’ ;

20 20 P19 13 1 19 0 3 ’ ’ ;

21 21 ANCH 1 3 20 0 3 ’ ’ ;Anchor support

22 22 TUTNO 4 7 4 0 1 ’"E305"’

;Form no

23 23 DATE 11 9 1 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

201 201 PP 1 1 0 0 1 ’1’ ;

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

209 209 SLOPE 13 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Slope

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E305 E319 General place channel routine

Define Define Weights

e305.eqp e319.uf pl_channel.uf e200.uf e201.uf

e305_ck.uf e200.tdf e201.tdf

e305.tdf e319.tdf E200.fb E201.fb

E305.fb E319.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

186 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Kettle Exchanger (E307)

To define the ends of this form, key in 2TO1, CAP, CONE, DOME, F&D, FLAT, FLGD, HEMI,

NONE, TORC, or TORS in the input fields E1 or E2. The appropriate End form (E905 (see "E1 Ends (E905)" on page 205) or E906 (see "E2 Ends (E906)" on page 206)) appears.

P9 defines the bundle pulling area. If P10, P11, P12, and P13 are not defined, the corresponding support is not placed. If P14 and P15 are not defined, all supports are not placed. The ANCH field defines which support will be anchored. The SLPE field defines the rise per foot around the selected place point for sloped

equipment. Select the Define option to establish user specific definitions and insulation thickness using

the Define (E200) (on page 168) form. Select the Define Weights option to establish the empty and operational weight of the

parametric using the Define Weights (E201) (on page 169) form. Select the Define Channel option to define the ends for the exchanger using the Exchanger

Ends (E319) (on page 190) form.

E307 Notes Specific to Form E307, Kettle Exchanger Use the DEFINE CHANNEL command to define the exchanger ends. For E1, define the applicable of 2T01, CAP, CONE, DOME, F&D, FLAT, FLGD, HEMI,

NONE, TORC, or TORS. Use a negative sign to define an inverted end. If additional details are required, the system will provide access to a secondary form. If revision of details is desired, re-entry of the applicable end type is required.

Use P9 to define the bundle pulling area. If P10, P11, P12, or P13 is not defined, the corresponding support will be omitted.

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 187

If P14 or P15 is not defined, all supports will be omitted. The ANCH field defines which support will be anchored. The SLPE field defines the rise per foot about the selected PP for sloped equipment. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equip group no

SHELL

952 2 P1 13 1 1 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 P2 13 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

954 4 P3 13 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P4 13 1 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P5 13 1 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;

957 7 P6 9 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

958 8 P7 13 1 7 0 3 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P8 9 1 8 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P9 13 1 9 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 E1 5 9 1 0 3 ’"2T01"’

;

SUPPORTS

12 12 P10 13 1 10 0 3 ’ ’ ;

13 13 P11 13 1 11 0 3 ’ ’ ;

14 14 P12 12 1 12 0 3 ’ ’ ;

15 15 P13 12 1 13 0 3 ’ ’ ;

16 16 P14 13 1 14 0 3 ’ ’ ;

17 17 P15 13 1 15 0 3 ’ ’ ;

18 18 ANCH 1 3 16 0 3 ’ ’ ;Anchor support

19 19 TUTNO 4 7 4 0 1 ’"E307"’

;Form no

20 20 DATE 11 9 4 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

201 201 PP 1 1 0 0 1 ’1’ ;

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

209 209 SLOPE 13 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Slope

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

188 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

E307 End E1

General place head routine

E319 General place channel routine

Define Define Weights

e307.eqp

e905.uf pl_head.uf e319e307.uf

pl_channel.uf

e200.uf e201.uf

e307_ck.uf

e905_ck.uf

pl_dome.uf e319e307_ck.uf

e200.tdf e201.tdf

e307.tdf e905.tdf

pl_torisph.uf e319.tdf E200.fb E201.fb

E307.fb E905.fb

pl_toricon.uf E319.fb

Vertical Shell and Tube Exchanger (E310)

If P7 and P8 are not defined, the extension joint is not placed. P10 defines the bundle pulling area. The default is the value for P1. For a skirt or ring support, do not enter a value for P12. If P13 and P15 are not defined, the

support is not placed. P14 must have a negative value to locate the support below data point one (DP)1.

Select the Define option to establish user specific definitions and insulation thickness using the Define (E200) (on page 168) form.

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 189

Select the Define Weights option to establish the empty and operational weight of the parametric using the Define Weights (E210) (see "Define Weights (E201)" on page 169) form.

Select the Define Channel option to define the ends for the exchanger using the Exchanger Ends (E319) (on page 190) form.

E310 Notes Specific to Form E310, Vert S&T Exchanger Use the DEFINE CHANNEL command to define the exchanger ends. If P7 or P8 is not defined, the expansion joint will be omitted. Use P10 to define the bundle pulling area. It defaults to P1. Either skirt, ring, or lug supports may be defined, as follows:

To define a skirt or ring, do not define a value for P12. If P13 or P15 is not defined, the support will be omitted. P14 must have a negative value to locate the support below PP1.

Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows: Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ’ ’ ;Equip group no

SHELL

952 2 P1 14 1 1 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 P2 13 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

954 4 P3 9 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P4 13 1 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P5 9 1 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;

957 7 P6 9 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

958 8 P7 13 1 7 0 3 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P8 12 1 8 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P9 13 1 9 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P10 14 1 10 0 3 ’F2’ ;

SUPPORTS

12 12 P11 11 2 11 0 3 ’ ’ ;

13 13 P12 1 3 12 0 3 ’ ’ ;

14 14 P13 13 1 13 0 3 ’ ’ ;

15 15 P14 15 1 14 0 3 ’ ’ ;

16 16 P15 13 1 15 0 3 ’ ’ ;

17 17 P16 13 1 16 0 3 ’ ’ ;

18 18 P17 12 1 17 0 3 ’ ’ ;

19 19 TUTNO 4 7 4 0 1 ’"E310"’

;Form no

20 20 DATE 11 9 1 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

190 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

201 201 PP 1 1 0 0 1 ’1’ ;

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E310 E319 General place channel routine

Define Define Weights

e310.eqp e319.uf pl_channel.uf e200.uf e201.uf

e310_ck.uf e200.tdf e201.tdf

e310.tdf e319.tdf E200.fb E201.fb

E310.fb E319.fb

Exchanger Ends (E319)

To enter this form, you must select the Define Channel option in an Exchanger form (E305

(see "Horizontal Shell and Tube Exchanger (E305)" on page 183), E307 (see "Kettle Exchanger (E307)" on page 186), or E310 (see "Vertical Shell and Tube Exchanger (E310)" on page 188)).

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 191

To accept the current modifications and return to the exchanger form, select the ACCEPT option. Select the EXIT option to ignore the current modifications and return to the parametric main menu.

Enter the applicable code (found under each graphic) in the TYPE field. P30 defines the front shell flange on the shell side of the exchanger. P32 defines the channel inlet location. P40 defines the rear shell flange on the shell side of the exchanger. For exchanger ends B, M, S, T, U, and W2, the system hardcodes the end to a 2TO1 end.

E319 Notes Specific to Form E319, Exchanger Ends In the TYPE field, define the code that applies. P30 defines the front shell flange on the shell side of the exchanger. P32 defines the location of the channel inlet. P40 defines the rear shell flange on the shell side of the exchanger. For exchanger ends B, M, S, T, U, and W2 the system hardcodes the end to a "+2T01" end. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

FRONT END

951 1 FETYPE

1 9 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;Front end type

952 2 P30 13 1 30 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 P31 9 1 31 0 3 ’ ’ ;

954 4 P32 12 1 32 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P33 12 1 33 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P34 9 1 34 0 3 ’ ’ ;

957 7 P35 9 1 35 0 3 ’ ’ ;

REAR END

958 8 RETYPE

2 9 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;Rear end type

959 9 P40 13 1 40 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P41 9 1 41 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P42 12 1 42 0 3 ’ ’ ;

12 12 P43 13 1 43 0 3 ’ ’ ;

13 13 P44 9 1 44 0 3 ’ ’ ;

14 14 DATE 11 9 10 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E319 General place channel routine

e319.uf pl_channel.uf

e319_ck.uf

e319.tdf

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

192 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

E319.fb

Double Pipe Exchanger (E320)

P4 is a nominal pipe diameter dimension. Actual outside diameter is used for graphic

display. P8 defines the bundle pulling area. The default is the value of P1 + P2. If P9 and P10 are not defined, the corresponding support is not placed. If P12 is not defined, all supports are not placed. The ANCH field defines which support will be anchored. The SLPE field defines the rise per foot around the selected place point for sloped

equipment. Select the Define option to establish user specific definitions and insulation thickness using

the Define (E200) (on page 168) form. Select the Define Weights option to establish the empty and operational weight of the

parametric using the Define Weights (E201) (on page 169) form.

E320 Notes Specific to Form E320, Dbl Pipe Exchanger P4 is a nominal pipe diameter dimension. Actual OD is used for graphic display. Use P8 to define the bundle pulling area. It defaults to P1 + P2. If P9 or P10 is not defined, the corresponding support will be omitted. If P12 is not defined, all supports will be omitted. The ANCH field defines which support will be anchored. The SLPE field defines the rise per foot about the selected PP for sloped equipment. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 193

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equip group no

SHELL

952 2 P1 13 1 1 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 P2 12 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

954 4 P3 12 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P4 9 1 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P5 12 1 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;

957 7 P6 12 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

958 8 P7 12 1 7 0 3 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P8 13 1 8 0 3 ’F2+F3’

;

SUPPORTS

960 10 P9 13 1 9 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P10 13 1 10 0 3 ’ ’ ;

12 12 P11 12 1 11 0 3 ’ ’ ;

13 13 P12 9 1 12 0 3 ’ ’ ;

14 14 P13 12 1 13 0 3 ’ ’ ;

15 15 ANCH 1 3 14 0 3 ’ ’ ;

16 16 TUTNO 4 7 4 0 1 ’"E320"’

;Form no

17 17 DATE 11 9 1 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

201 201 PP 1 1 0 0 1 ’1’ ;

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

209 209 SLOPE 13 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Slope

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E320 Define Define Weights

e320.eqp e200.uf e201.uf

e320_ck.uf e200.tdf e201.tdf

e320.tdf E200.fb E201.fb

E320.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

194 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Plate Exchanger (E325)

The ANCH field defines which support will be anchored. The SLPE field defines the rise per foot around the selected place point for sloped

equipment. Select the Define option to establish user specific definitions and insulation thickness using

the Define (E200) (on page 168) form. Select the Define Weights option to establish the empty and operational weight of the

parametric using the Define Weights (E201) (on page 169) form.

E325 Notes Specific to Form E325, Plate Exchanger The ANCH field defines which support will be anchored. The SLPE field defines the rise per foot about the selected PP for sloped equipment. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ’ ’ ;Equip group no

EXCHANGER

952 2 P1 13 1 1 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 P2 13 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

954 4 P3 9 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P4 13 1 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P5 13 1 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;

957 7 P6 13 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 195

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

958 8 P7 13 1 7 0 3 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P8 13 1 8 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P9 9 1 9 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P10 13 1 10 0 3 ’ ’ ;

12 12 P11 9 1 11 0 3 ’ ’ ;

13 13 P12 12 1 12 0 3 ’ ’ ;

14 14 P13 13 1 13 0 3 ’ ’ ;

15 15 P14 9 1 14 0 3 ’ ’ ;

16 16 P15 12 1 15 0 3 ’ ’ ;

17 17 ANCH 1 3 16 0 3 ’ ’ ;

18 18 TUTNO 4 7 4 0 1 ’"E325"’ ;Form no

19 19 DATE 11 9 1 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

201 201 PP 1 1 0 0 1 ’1’ ;

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

209 209 SLOPE 13 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Slope

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E325 Define Define Weights

e325.eqp e200.uf e201.uf

e325_ck.uf e200.tdf e201.tdf

e325.tdf E200.fb E201.fb

E325.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

196 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Air Cooler (E330)

To select the appropriate Air Cooler Bay, you must key in either I or F in the TYPE field.

Type I (induced draft) brings up the Induced Draft Air Cooler Bay form (E332) (see "Induced Draft Air Cooler Bay (E332)" on page 198). Type F (forced draft) brings up the Forced Draft Air Cooler Bay form (E334) (see "Forced Draft Air Cooler Bay (E334)" on page 199).

The BAYS field defines the number of units that apply. Data points (DP) are assumed to be located at mid-height and mid-width of inlet headers. Select the Define option to establish user specific definitions and insulation thickness using

the Define (E200) (on page 168) form. Select the Define Weights option to establish the empty and operational weight of the

parametric using the Define Weights (E201) (on page 169) form.

E330 Notes Specific to Form E330, Air Cooler In the TYPE field, define whether an induced (I) or a forced draft (F) air cooler applies. A

secondary form will be accessed to allow definition of details. All air coolers must be identical. If revision of details is desired, re-entry of the applicable type is required.

In the BAYS field, define the number of units that apply. DPs are assumed to be located at mid-height and mid-width of inlet headers. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equip group no

952 2 TYPE 1 9 1 0 3 ’ ’ ;

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 197

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

953 3 BAYS 1 3 1 0 3 ’1’ ;

954 4 P1 12 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P2 12 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P3 12 1 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

957 7 TUTNO 4 7 4 0 1 ’"E330"’

;Form no

958 8 DATE 11 9 2 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

201 201 PP 1 1 0 0 1 ’1’ ;

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E330 E332 E334 Define Define Weights

e330.eqp e332e334.uf e334.tdf e200.uf e201.uf

e330_ck.uf e332e334_ck.uf

E334.fb e200.tdf e201.tdf

e330.tdf e332.tdf E200.fb E201.fb

E330.fb E332.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

198 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Induced Draft Air Cooler Bay (E332)

To enter this form, you must key in I in the Air Cooler form (E330) (see "Air Cooler

(E330)" on page 196). To accept the current modifications and return to the Air Cooler form, select the ACCEPT option. Select the EXIT option to ignore the current modifications and return to the parametric main menu.

Data points (DP) are assumed to be located at mid-height and mid-width of inlet headers. P30 defines the number of fans that apply in one unit. Fans are spaced by the distance

specified in P32. If P34 is not defined, fans are not placed.

E332 Notes Specific to Form E332, Induced Draft Air Cooler Bay DPs are assumed to be located at mid-height and mid-width of inlet header. P30 defines the number of fans that apply in one unit. Fans are spaced by a distance P32. If P34 is not defined, fans will be omitted. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 P21 13 1 21 0 3 ' ' ;

952 2 P22 13 1 22 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 P23 13 1 23 0 3 ’ ’ ;

954 4 P24 13 1 24 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P25 13 1 25 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P26 12 1 26 0 3 ’ ’ ;

957 7 P27 12 1 27 0 3 ’ ’ ;

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 199

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

958 8 P28 12 1 28 0 3 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P29 12 1 29 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P30 1 3 30 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P31 13 1 31 0 3 ’ ’ ;

12 12 P32 13 1 32 0 3 ’ ’ ;

13 13 P33 13 1 33 0 3 ’ ’ ;

14 14 P34 12 1 34 0 3 ’ ’ ;

15 15 DATE 11 9 10 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E332

e332e334.uf

e332e334_ck.uf

e332.tdf

E332.fb

Forced Draft Air Cooler Bay (E334)

To enter this form, you must key in F in the Air Cooler form (E330) (see "Air Cooler

(E330)" on page 196). To accept the current modifications and return to the Air Cooler form, select the ACCEPT option. Select the EXIT option to ignore the current modifications and return to the parametric main menu.

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

200 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Form

Data points (DP) are assumed to be located at mid-height and mid-width of inlet headers. P30 defines the number of fans that apply in one unit. Fan are spaced by the distance

specified in P32. If P34 is not defined, fans are not placed.

E334 Notes Specific to Form E334, Forced Draft Air Cooler Bay See paragraph E332 for notes. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 P21 13 1 21 0 3 ’ ’ ;

952 2 P22 13 1 22 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 P23 13 1 23 0 3 ’ ’ ;

954 4 P24 13 1 24 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P25 13 1 25 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P26 12 1 26 0 3 ’ ’ ;

957 7 P27 12 1 27 0 3 ’ ’ ;

958 8 P28 12 1 28 0 3 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P29 12 1 29 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P30 1 3 30 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P31 13 1 31 0 3 ’ ’ ;

12 12 P32 13 1 32 0 3 ’ ’ ;

13 13 P33 13 1 33 0 3 ’ ’ ;

14 14 P34 12 1 34 0 3 ’ ’ ;

15 15 DATE 11 9 10 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E334

e332e334.uf

e332e334_ck.uf

e334.tdf

E334.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 201

Horizontal Rotating Equipment and Driver (E405)

Values of P1, P2, P3, and P4 must be positive values greater than zero. Values for the other

fields are optional. P5 must be specified as a negative value. The following rules must be followed:

-P5 + P7 + P12 + P14 must be less than or equal to P1. P8 must be less than or equal to P2. P9 must be less than or equal to P3. P15 must be less than or equal to P2. P16 must be less than or equal to P3. P17 must be greater than P11 + P13 / 2.

Select the Define option to establish user specific definitions and insulation thickness using the Define (E200) (on page 168) form.

Select the Define Weights option to establish the empty and operational weight of the parametric using the Define Weights (E201) (on page 169) form.

E405 Notes Specific to Form E405, Hor Rot Equip & Driver Values of P1, P2, P3, and P4 must be nonzero positive values. Values for other fields are

optional. P5 must be specified as a negative value. Following rules must be observed:

-P5 + P7 + P12 + P14 must be less than or equal to P1 P8 must be less than or equal to P2

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

202 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

P9 must be less than or equal to P3 P15 must be less than or equal to P2 P16 must be less than or equal to P3 P17 must be greater than P11 + P13/2

The following comments apply, but do not include in the help form: P13/2 must be less than P8 P13/2 must be less than P9 P13/2 must be less than P10 P13/2 must be less than P11 P13/2 must be less than P15 P13/2 must be less than P16

Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows: Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equip group no

BASE

952 2 P1 13 1 1 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 P2 13 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

954 4 P3 13 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P4 12 1 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P5 14 1 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;

ROTATING EQUIP

957 7 P6 13 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

958 8 P7 13 1 7 0 3 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P8 13 1 8 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P9 13 1 9 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 P10 13 1 10 0 3 ’ ’ ;

12 12 P11 13 1 11 0 3 ’ ’ ;

DRIVER

13 13 P12 13 1 12 0 3 ’ ’ ;

14 14 P13 12 1 13 0 3 ’ ’ ;

15 15 P14 13 1 14 0 3 ’ ’ ;

16 16 P15 13 1 15 0 3 ’ ’ ;

17 17 P16 13 1 16 0 3 ’ ’ ;

18 18 P17 13 1 17 0 3 ’ ’ ;

19 19 TUTNO 4 7 4 0 1 ’"E405"’

;Form no

20 20 DATE 11 9 1 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 203

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

201 201 PP 1 1 0 0 1 ’1’ ;

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E405 Define Define Weights

e405.eqp e200.uf e201.uf

e405_ck.uf e200.tdf e201.tdf

e405.tdf E200.fb E201.fb

E405.fb

Vertical Rotating Equipment and Driver (E410)

Values of P1, P2, P3, and P4 must be positive values greater than zero. Values for the other

fields are optional. P9 defines the pulling area. Select the Define option to establish user specific definitions and insulation thickness using

the Define (E200) (on page 168) form.

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

204 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Select the Define Weights option to establish the empty and operational weight of the parametric using the Define Weights (E201) (on page 169) form.

E410 Notes Specific to Form E410, Vert Rot Equip & Driver Values of P1, P2, P3, and P4 must be nonzero positive values. Values for other fields are

optional. Use P9 to define the pulling area. The following comments apply, but do not include in the help form:

If P5 is specified, value of P5 must be less than or equal to value of P3. If P8 is specified, value of P8 must be greater than or equal to value of P3.

Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows: Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 ITEM 12 7 1 0 1 ' ' ;Equip group no

PUMP

952 2 P1 13 1 1 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 P2 13 1 2 0 3 ’ ’ ;

954 4 P3 13 1 3 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 P4 13 1 4 0 3 ’ ’ ;

956 6 P5 12 1 5 0 3 ’ ’ ;

DRIVER

957 7 P6 13 1 6 0 3 ’ ’ ;

958 8 P7 13 1 7 0 3 ’ ’ ;

959 9 P8 13 1 8 0 3 ’ ’ ;

960 10 P9 13 1 9 0 3 ’ ’ ;

11 11 TUTNO 4 7 4 0 1 ’"E410"’

;Form no

12 12 DATE 11 9 1 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

201 201 PP 1 1 0 0 1 ’1’ ;

202 202 X 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 18 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 11 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E410 Define Define Weights

e410.eqp e200.uf e201.uf

e410_ck.uf e200.tdf e201.tdf

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 205

e410.tdf E200.fb E201.fb

E410.fb

E1 Ends (E905)

Valid for the E1 prompt (E205 (see "Complex Vertical Cylindrical Equipment, Skirt

(E205)" on page 171) or E240 (see "Complex Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment (E240)" on page 179)) include: 2TO1, CAP, CONE, DOME, F&D, FLAT, FLGD, HEMI, NONE, TORC, or TORS.

2TO1, CAP, F&D, FLAT, HEMI, and NONE ends are depicted using data retrieved by the system (Form E905 is not displayed).

CONE, DOME, FLGD, TORC, and TORS ends are depicted from data defined in this form (Form E905 is displayed and must be defined).

E905 Notes Specific to Form E905, E1 Ends 2T01, CAP, F&D, FLAT, HEMI, and NONE ends are depicted using data derived by the

system. CONE, DOME, FLGD, TORC, and TORS ends are depicted from data defined in this form. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 TYPE 5 9 31 0 3 'C1' ;Head type

952 2 P50 14 1 50 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 P51 13 1 51 0 3 ’ ’ ;

954 4 P52 13 1 52 0 3 ’ ’ ;

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

206 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

955 5 DATE 11 9 34 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E905

e905.uf

e905_ck.uf

e905.tdf

E905.fb

E2 Ends (E906)

Valid values for the E2 prompt (E205 (see "Complex Vertical Cylindrical Equipment, Skirt

(E205)" on page 171) or E240 (see "Complex Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment (E240)" on page 179)) include: 2TO1, CAP, CONE, DOME, F&D, FLAT, FLGD, HEMI, NONE, TORC, or TORS.

2TO1, CAP, F&D, FLAT, HEMI, and NONE ends are depicted using data retrieved by the system (Form E906 is not displayed).

CONE, DOME, FLGD, TORC, and TORS ends are depicted from data defined in this form (Form E906 is displayed and must be defined).

E906 Notes Specific to Form E906, E2 Ends Refer to paragraph E905 for comments. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 207

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 TYPE 5 9 32 0 3 'C2' ;Head type

952 2 P55 14 1 55 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 P56 13 1 56 0 3 ’ ’ ;

954 4 P57 13 1 57 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 DATE 11 9 35 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E906

e906.uf

e906_ck.uf

e906.tdf

E906.fb

E3 Ends (E907)

Valid values for the E3 prompt (E205 (see "Complex Vertical Cylindrical Equipment, Skirt

(E205)" on page 171) or E240 (see "Complex Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment (E240)" on page 179)) include: 2TO1, CAP, CONE, DOME, F&D, FLAT, FLGD, HEMI, NONE, TORC, or TORS.

2TO1, CAP, F&D, FLAT, HEMI, and NONE ends are depicted using data retrieved by the system (Form E907 is not displayed).

CONE, DOME, FLGD, TORC, and TORS ends are depicted from data defined in this form (Form E907 is displayed and must be defined).

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

208 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

E907 Notes Specific to Form E907, E3 Ends Refer to paragraph E905 for comments. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 TYPE 5 9 33 0 3 'C3' ;Head type

952 2 P60 14 1 60 0 3 ’ ’ ;

953 3 P61 13 1 61 0 3 ’ ’ ;

954 4 P62 13 1 62 0 3 ’ ’ ;

955 5 DATE 11 9 36 0 1 ’C38’ - ;Date

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

E907

e907.uf

e907_ck.uf

e907.tdf

E907.fb

Complex Vertical Cylindrical Equipment (N205)

The nozzle parametrics, N205 - N410, are included in this appendix, but Appendix:

Equipment Data Definition contains more information on nozzles.

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 209

Simple Vertical Cylindrical Equipment (N210)

Simple Vertical Cylindrical Equipment (N215)

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

210 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Spherical Equipment (N230)

Complex Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment (N240)

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 211

Simple Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment (N245)

Horizontal Shell and Tube Exchanger (N305)

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

212 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Kettle Exchanger (N307)

Vertical Shell and Tube Exchanger (N310)

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 213

Double Pipe Exchanger (N320)

Plate Exchanger (N325)

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

214 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Air Cooler (N330)

Horizontal Rotating Equipment and Driver (N405)

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 215

Vertical Rotating Equipment and Driver (N410)

Gear Cover (U850)

U850 Notes Specific to Form U850, Gear Cover This form is used to define a flat oval projected with face parallel to each other.

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

216 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

It is placed by a point in the middle of the first face. The active primary axis orients the direction of projection. The active secondary axis orients the flat sides of the faces.

Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows: Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 A 16 1 1 0 2 ' ' ;Distance

952 2 B 16 1 2 0 2 ’ ’ ;Diameter1

953 3 C 16 1 3 0 2 ’ ’ ;Diameter2

954 4 D 16 1 4 0 2 ’ ’ ;Projection

202 202 X 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 16 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

U850

u850.eqp

u850.uf

u850.tdf

U850.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 217

Round Torus Miter (U860)

U860 Notes Specific to Form U860, Circular Miter This form is used to define a segmented round torus. It is placed by a point in the middle of the first face. The active primary axis orients the

direction of projection of the first segment. The active secondary axis points to the center of rotation.

Maximum number of miter sections per miter is 30. Maximum bend angle per miter is 180 degrees. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 A 16 1 1 0 2 ' ' ;Bend radius

952 2 B 16 2 2 0 2 ’ ’ ;Bend angle

953 3 C 16 3 3 0 2 ’ ’ ;No of miter sections

954 4 D 16 1 4 0 2 ’ ’ ;Cyl diameter

202 202 X 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 16 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

218 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

U860

u860.eqp

u860.uf

u860.tdf

U860.fb

Rectangular Torus Miter (U861)

U861 Notes Specific to Form U861, Rectangular Miter This form is used to define a segmented rectangular torus. It is placed by a point in the middle of the first face. The active primary axis orients the

direction of projection of the first segment. The active secondary axis points to the center of rotation.

Maximum number of miter sections per miter is 30. Maximum bend angle per miter is 180 degrees. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 A 16 1 1 0 2 ' ' ;Bend radius

952 2 B 16 2 2 0 2 ’ ’ ;Bend angle

953 3 C 16 3 3 0 2 ’ ’ ;No of miter sections

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 219

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

954 4 D 16 1 4 0 2 ’ ’ ;Rect depth

955 5 E 16 1 5 0 2 ’ ’ ;Rect width

202 202 X 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 16 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

U861

u861.eqp

u861.uf

u861.tdf

U861.fb

Vertical Oval Torus Miter (U862)

U862 Notes Specific to Form U862, Vertical Oval Miter This form is used to define a segmented flat oval torus.

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

220 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

It is placed by a point in the middle of the first face. The active primary axis orients the direction of projection of the first segment. The active secondary axis points to the center of rotation.

Maximum number of miter sections per miter is 30. Maximum bend angle per miter is 180 degrees. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 A 16 1 1 0 2 ' ' ;Bend radius

952 2 B 16 2 2 0 2 ’ ’ ;Bend angle

953 3 C 16 3 3 0 2 ’ ’ ;No of miter sections

954 4 D 16 1 4 0 2 ’ ’ ;Oval depth

955 5 E 16 1 5 0 2 ’ ’ ;Oval width

202 202 X 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 16 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

U862

u862.eqp

u862.uf

u862.tdf

U862.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 221

Flat Oval Torus Miter (U863)

U863 Notes Specific to Form U863, Horizontal Oval Miter This form is used to define a segmented horizontal flat oval torus. It is placed by a point in the middle of the first face. The active primary axis orients the

direction of projection of the first segment. The active secondary axis points to the center of rotation.

Maximum number of miter sections per miter is 30. Maximum bend angle per miter is 180 degrees. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 A 16 1 1 0 2 ' ' ;Bend radius

952 2 B 16 2 2 0 2 ’ ’ ;Bend angle

953 3 C 16 3 3 0 2 ’ ’ ;No of miter sections

954 4 D 16 1 4 0 2 ’ ’ ;Oval depth

955 5 E 16 1 5 0 2 ’ ’ ;Oval width

202 202 X 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 16 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

222 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

U863

u863.eqp

u863.uf

u863.tdf

U863.fb

Flat Oval Prism (U870)

U870 Notes Specific to Form U870, Oval to Oval Prism This form is used to define a flat oval prism projected with face parallel but offset along both

secondary and normal axis to each other. It is placed by a point in the middle of the first face. The active primary axis orients the

direction of projection. The active secondary axis orients the flat sides of the faces. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDFNo

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 A 16 1 1 0 2 ' ' ;Prism height

952 2 B 16 1 2 0 2 ’ ’ ;Oval width1

953 3 C 16 1 3 0 2 ’ ’ ;Oval depth1

954 4 D 16 1 4 0 2 ’ ’ ;Oval width2

955 5 E 16 1 5 0 2 ’ ’ ;Oval depth2

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 223

Form Gadget Label

TDFNo

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

956 6 F 16 1 6 0 2 '0' ;Oval offset1

957 7 G 16 1 7 0 2 '0' ;Oval offset2

202 202 X 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 16 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

U870

u870.eqp

u870.uf

u870.tdf

U870.fb

Flat Oval Torus (U880)

U880 Notes Specific to Form U880, Oval Torus This form is used to define a flat oval torus.

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

224 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

It is placed by a point in the middle of the first face. The active primary axis is the normal of the starting face. The active secondary axis points to the center of rotation.

A value of 0 for Parameter E (oval rotation) places the oval face vertical. A value of 90 for Parameter E (oval rotation) places the oval face horizontal.

Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows: Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 A 16 1 1 0 2 ' ' ;Bend radius

952 2 B 16 2 2 0 2 ’ ’ ;Bend angle

953 3 C 16 1 3 0 2 ’ ’ ;Oval width

954 4 D 16 1 4 0 2 ’ ’ ;Oval depth

955 5 E 16 2 5 0 2 ’0’ ;Oval rotation

202 202 X 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 16 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

U880

u880.eqp

u880.uf

u880.tdf

U880.fb

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 225

Rectangular 90 Cone Torus with Offset (U881)

U881 Notes Specific to Form U881, Rectangular to Rectangular Torus This form is used to define a rectangular torus, with or without an offset. It is placed by a point in the middle of the first face. The active primary axis is the normal of

the starting face. The active secondary axis points to the center of rotation. Characteristics of the parameters that apply to this form are as follows:

Form Gadget Label

TDF No

TDF Name

Field Length

Field Type

Var No / Att No

Nozzle Seq No

Exit Code

Default Value

T2210 Att No

Explanatory Remarks

951 1 A 16 1 1 0 2 ' ' ;Bend radius

952 2 B 16 1 2 0 2 ’ ’ ;Rect width1

953 3 C 16 1 3 0 2 ’ ’ ;Rect depth1

954 4 D 16 1 4 0 2 ’ ’ ;Rect width2

955 5 E 16 1 5 0 2 ’ ’ ;Rect depth2

956 6 F 16 1 6 0 2 ’0’ ;Rect offfset1

957 7 G 16 1 7 0 2 ’0’ ;Rect offset2

958 8 H 16 1 8 0 2 ’0’ ;Rect offset3

202 202 X 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site <EW coord of PP

203 203 Y 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site NS coord of PP

204 204 EL 16 1 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Site elev of PP

208 208 ANG 16 2 0 0 1 ’ ’ ;Ang site N equip N

Following is a list of form elements and their associated files:

Appendix: Delivered Parametrics

226 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

U881

u881.eqp

u881.uf

u881.tdf

U881.fb

User Projected Shape (USRPRJ)

Index

A Abort • 40 Additional Features of the Form Interface •

100 Air Cooler (E330) • 194 Air Cooler (N330) • 212 Appendix

Codelist (CL330) • 113 Delivered Parametrics • 141 EQP Eden Program Examples • 123 Equipment Data Definition • 119

Application Commands • 98 Arithmetic Operators • 24

B Basic Use of Forms • 96 Begin • 14 Begin EQP Category • 15 Beginning Statements • 13

C Call Statement • 26 Call Tutorial (C) • 107 Circular Platform (A001) • 143 Comments • 24 Common Keywords • 22 Compiling New Modules • 95 Complex Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment

(E240) • 177 Complex Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment

(N240) • 208 Complex Vertical Cylindrical Equipment

(N205) • 206 Complex Vertical Cylindrical Equipment,

Skirt (E205) • 169 Concurrent Display • 106 Convert NPD to Subunits • 31 Convert Unit • 40 Creating a New Equipment Component • 91

D Davit A (A061) • 163

Davit B (A063) • 164 Debugger Commands • 106 Default Project Control Data • 92 Define (E200) • 166 Define Active Orientation • 31 Define Active Point • 41 Define Datum Point • 41 Define Library • 42 Define Nozzle • 43 Define Orientation By Points • 45 Define Placepoint • 46 Define Point • 46 Define Weights (E201) • 167 Defining Symbols • 101 Deposit Global (DG) • 108 Deposit Local (DL) • 108 DESCRIPTION Statement • 23 Display Message • 47 Display Tutorial • 48 Do While Statement • 27 Double Pipe Exchanger (E320) • 190 Double Pipe Exchanger (N320) • 211 Draw Arc • 49 Draw Complex Surface • 50 Draw Con Prism • 52 Draw Cone • 33 Draw Curve • 53 Draw Cylinder • 34 Draw Ecc Prism • 54 Draw Ecc Transitional Element • 55 Draw Eccentric Cone • 35 Draw Ellipse • 56 Draw Line • 56 Draw Line String • 57 Draw Proj Hexagon • 57 Draw Proj Octagon • 58 Draw Proj Shape • 60 Draw Projected Rectangle • 36 Draw Projected Triangle • 37 Draw Rectangular Torus • 61 Draw Revolved Shape • 62 Draw Semi-Ellipsoid • 38 Draw Shape • 63 Draw Sphere • 39 Draw Torus • 39

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 227

Index

228 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Draw Transitional Element • 64

E E1 Ends (E905) • 203 E2 Ends (E906) • 204 E3 Ends (E907) • 205 Eden Debugger • 105 Eden Language Structure • 13 Editing Modules • 95 Ending Statements • 14 Equipment Group Database Table • 120 Equipment Nozzle Database Table • 120 Equipment Symbol Processor • 1 Examine Global Variables (EG) • 109 Examine Local Variables (EL) • 108 Examine Source File Segments (TYPE) •

110 Examine Symbol Name (ES) • 110 Example 1 (Use of loops) • 123 Example 10 (Insulation Graphics) • 131 Example 2 (Use of arrays and loops) • 124 Example 3 (Placing nozzles) • 124 Example 4 (Use of character string variables)

• 125 Example 5 (Graphic selection commands) •

125 Example 6 • 126 Example 7 • 126 Example 8 • 127 Example 9 • 127 Exchanger Ends (E319) • 188 Exiting the Debugger • 105 Expressions • 25 Extracting Sample Modules • 94

F Flat Oval Prism (U870) • 220 Flat Oval Torus (U880) • 221 Flat Oval Torus Miter (U863) • 219 Forced Draft Air Cooler Bay (E334) • 197 Forms Interface • 11 Functions • 28

G Gear Cover (U850) • 213 Get Arc Points • 64 Get Arc Size • 65

Get Date • 66 Get EQP Category • 66 Get Line Size • 67 Get Point • 67 Global Variables (EQP Specific) • 20 Global Variables Common to Equipment and

Pipe Support Modeling • 20 Global Variables Common to Piping,

Equipment, and Pipe Support Modeling • 19

H Handrail A (A051) • 161 Holes for Miscellaneous Platforms (A016) •

150 Holes for Platforms (A015) • 148 Horizontal Rotating Equipment and Driver

(E405) • 199 Horizontal Rotating Equipment and Driver

(N405) • 212 Horizontal Shell and Tube Exchanger (E305)

• 181 Horizontal Shell and Tube Exchanger (N305)

• 209

I If - then - else Statement • 28 Indexed Do Statement • 27 Induced Draft Air Cooler Bay (E332) • 196 Input Fields • 97 Invoking the Debugger • 105

K Kettle Exchanger (E307) • 184 Kettle Exchanger (N307) • 210

L Local Variables • 17 Logical Operators • 25

M Miscellaneous Platform (A003) • 146 Move Along Arc • 69 Move Along Axis • 70 Move Along Line • 71 Move By Distance • 72

Index

Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface 229

Move Data • 72 Move To Placepoint • 73 Move to Specific Source Line or Continue

(Go) • 111

O Operators • 24

P Place COG • 73 Plate Exchanger (E325) • 192 Plate Exchanger (N325) • 211 Position Cursor • 74 Preface PDS • vii Primitives • 29 Put Field • 75

R Read Table • 76 Rectangular 90 Cone Torus with Offset

(U881) • 223 Rectangular Torus Miter (U861) • 216 Relational Operators • 25 Replacement Statements • 26 Retrieve Nozzle Parameters • 77 Revising Modules • 96 Rotate Orientation • 78 Round Torus Miter (U860) • 215

S Set Line Break (B) • 107 Setup for Equipment • 91 Side Ladder A (A031) • 156 Side Ladder Details (A039) • 157 Simple Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment

(E245) • 179 Simple Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment

(N245) • 209 Simple Vertical Cylindrical Equipment

(N210) • 207 Simple Vertical Cylindrical Equipment

(N215) • 207 Simple Vertical Cylindrical Equipment, Legs

(E215) • 173 Simple Vertical Cylindrical Equipment, Skirt

(E210) • 171 Spherical Equipment (E230) • 175

Spherical Equipment (N230) • 208 Stairs A (A041) • 159 Start Complex Shape • 79 Step into User Function (SI) • 112 Step through Source Code (S) • 111 Stop Complex Shape • 79 Store Nozzle Parameters • 81 Store Orientation • 80 Subscripted Global Variables • 21 Switch Modes (ON and OF) • 106 Switch the Prompt Terminal (P) • 112 System-Defined Application Commands • 99 System-Defined Field Numbers • 97

T The Eden Basics • 1 Thru Ladder A (A021) • 153 Thru Ladder Details (A029) • 154 Tutorial Definition Table • 5 TYPE Statement • 23

U User Function • 81 User Function FLAT_OVAL_PRISM • 82 User Function FLAT_OVAL_SEG_TOR1 •

84 User Function FLAT_OVAL_SEG_TOR2 •

85 User Function FLAT_OVAL_TOR • 83 User Function RECT_FLAT_OVAL • 89 User Function RECT_SEG_TOR • 88 User Function ROUND_RECT • 90 User Function ROUND_SEG_TOR1 • 86 User Function ROUND_SEG_TOR2 • 87 User Projected Shape (USRPRJ) • 224 User-Defined Application Commands • 98

V Variables • 17 Vertical Oval Torus Miter (U862) • 217 Vertical Rotating Equipment and Driver

(E410) • 201 Vertical Rotating Equipment and Driver

(N410) • 213 Vertical Shell and Tube Exchanger (E310) •

186

Index

230 Plant Design System (PDS) Equipment Eden Interface

Vertical Shell and Tube Exchanger (N310) • 210

W What's New in Equipment Eden Interface •

ix